TREASURE ISLAND

By

Robert Louis Stevenson

Illustrated by Louis Rhead

Treasure Island Page |1

Contents

TREASURE ISLAND ......................................................................................................................................... 4

PART ONE — THE OLD BUCCANEER.............................................................................................................. 6
The Old Sea-Dog At The “Admiral Benbow” ............................................................................................. 6
Black Dog Appears and Disappears......................................................................................................... 13
The Black Spot ......................................................................................................................................... 19
The Sea-Chest ......................................................................................................................................... 25
The Last of the Blind Man ....................................................................................................................... 32
The Captain’s Papers ............................................................................................................................... 37
PART TWO — THE SEA-COOK ..................................................................................................................... 44
I Go To Bristol .......................................................................................................................................... 44
At the Sign of the Spy-glass..................................................................................................................... 50
Powder and Arms.................................................................................................................................... 56
The Voyage.............................................................................................................................................. 63

Treasure Island Page |2

 What I Heard in the Apple Barrel ............................................................................................................ 70
Council of War......................................................................................................................................... 77
PART THREE — MY SHORE ADVENTURE .................................................................................................... 83
How My Shore Adventure Began............................................................................................................ 83
The First Blow.......................................................................................................................................... 88
The Man of the Island ............................................................................................................................. 94
PART FOUR — THE STOCKADE .................................................................................................................. 101
Narrative Continued by the Doctor: How the Ship Was Abandoned ................................................... 101
Narrative Continued by the Doctor: The Jolly-boat’s Last Trip ............................................................. 107
Narrative Continued by the Doctor: End of the First Day’s Fighting .................................................... 112
Narrative Resumed by Jim Hawkins: The Garrison in the Stockade ..................................................... 117
Silver’s Embassy .................................................................................................................................... 123
The Attack ............................................................................................................................................. 128
PART FIVE — MY SEA ADVENTURE ........................................................................................................... 134
How My Sea Adventure Began ............................................................................................................. 134
The Ebb-Tide Runs ................................................................................................................................ 140
The Cruise of the Coracle ...................................................................................................................... 146
I Strike the Jolly Roger........................................................................................................................... 153
Israel Hands........................................................................................................................................... 159
“Pieces of Eight”.................................................................................................................................... 166
PART SIX — CAPTAIN SILVER ..................................................................................................................... 173
In the Enemy’s Camp ............................................................................................................................ 173
The Black Spot Again ............................................................................................................................. 180
On Parole .............................................................................................................................................. 186
The Treasure-hunt—Flint’s Pointer ...................................................................................................... 194
The Treasure-hunt—The Voice Among the Trees ................................................................................ 200
The Fall of a Chieftain ........................................................................................................................... 206
And Last................................................................................................................................................. 212

Treasure Island Page |3

 TREASURE ISLAND

To S.L.O., an American gentleman in accordance with whose classic taste the following narrative
has been designed, it is now, in return for numerous delightful hours, and with the kindest wishes,
dedicated by his affectionate friend, the author.

TO THE HESITATING PURCHASER

If sailor tales to sailor tunes,

Storm and adventure, heat and cold,
If schooners, islands, and maroons,
And buccaneers, and buried gold,
And all the old romance, retold
Exactly in the ancient way,
Can please, as me they pleased of old,
The wiser youngsters of today:

—So be it, and fall on! If not,

If studious youth no longer crave,
His ancient appetites forgot,
Kingston, or Ballantyne the brave,
Or Cooper of the wood and wave:
So be it, also! And may I
And all my pirates share the grave
Where these and their creations lie!

Treasure Island Page |4

Treasure Island Page |5
 PART ONE — THE OLD BUCCANEER

The Old Sea-Dog At The “Admiral Benbow”

SQUIRE TRELAWNEY, Dr. Livesey, and the rest of these gentlemen having asked me
to write down the whole particulars about Treasure Island, from the beginning to the
end, keeping nothing back but the bearings of the island, and that only because there
is still treasure not yet lifted, I take up my pen in the year of grace 17__ and go back to
the time when my father kept the Admiral Benbow inn and the brown old seaman with
the sabre cut first took up his lodging under our roof.
I remember him as if it were yesterday, as he came plodding to the inn door, his sea-
chest following behind him in a hand-barrow—a tall, strong, heavy, nut-brown man, his
tarry pigtail falling over the shoulder of his soiled blue coat, his hands ragged and
scarred, with black, broken nails, and the sabre cut across one cheek, a dirty, livid white.
I remember him looking round the cove and whistling to himself as he did so, and then
breaking out in that old sea-song that he sang so often afterwards:
“Fifteen men on the dead man’s chest—
Yo-ho-ho, and a bottle of rum!”

Treasure Island Page |6

 in the high, old tottering voice that seemed to have been tuned and broken at the
capstan bars. Then he rapped on the door with a bit of stick like a handspike that he
carried, and when my father appeared, called roughly for a glass of rum. This, when it
was brought to him, he drank slowly, like a connoisseur, lingering on the taste and still
looking about him at the cliffs and up at our signboard.
“This is a handy cove,” says he at length; “and a pleasant sittyated grog-shop. Much
company, mate?”
My father told him no, very little company, the more was the pity.
“Well, then,” said he, “this is the berth for me. Here you, matey,” he cried to the man
who trundled the barrow; “bring up alongside and help up my chest. I’ll stay here a bit,”
he continued. “I’m a plain man; rum and bacon and eggs is what I want, and that head
up there for to watch ships off. What you mought call me? You mought call me captain.
Oh, I see what you’re at—there”; and he threw down three or four gold pieces on the
threshold. “You can tell me when I’ve worked through that,” says he, looking as fierce
as a commander.
And indeed bad as his clothes were and coarsely as he spoke, he had none of the
appearance of a man who sailed before the mast, but seemed like a mate or skipper
accustomed to be obeyed or to strike. The man who came with the barrow told us the
mail had set him down the morning before at the Royal George, that he had inquired
what inns there were along the coast, and hearing ours well spoken of, I suppose, and
described as lonely, had chosen it from the others for his place of residence. And that
was all we could learn of our guest.
He was a very silent man by custom. All day he hung round the cove or upon the cliffs
with a brass telescope; all evening he sat in a corner of the parlour next the fire and
drank rum and water very strong. Mostly he would not speak when spoken to, only look
up sudden and fierce and blow through his nose like a fog-horn; and we and the people
who came about our house soon learned to let him be. Every day when he came back
from his stroll he would ask if any seafaring men had gone by along the road. At first we
thought it was the want of company of his own kind that made him ask this question,
but at last we began to see he was desirous to avoid them. When a seaman did put up
at the Admiral Benbow (as now and then some did, making by the coast road for Bristol)
he would look in at him through the curtained door before he entered the parlour; and
he was always sure to be as silent as a mouse when any such was present. For me, at
least, there was no secret about the matter, for I was, in a way, a sharer in his alarms.
He had taken me aside one day and promised me a silver fourpenny on the first of every
month if I would only keep my “weather-eye open for a seafaring man with one leg”
and let him know the moment he appeared. Often enough when the first of the month

Treasure Island Page |7

came round and I applied to him for my wage, he would only blow through his nose at
me and stare me down, but before the week was out he was sure to think better of it,
bring me my four-penny piece, and repeat his orders to look out for “the seafaring man
with one leg.”
How that personage haunted my dreams, I need scarcely tell you. On stormy nights,
when the wind shook the four corners of the house and the surf roared along the cove
and up the cliffs, I would see him in a thousand forms, and with a thousand diabolical
expressions. Now the leg would be cut off at the knee, now at the hip; now he was a
monstrous kind of a creature who had never had but the one leg, and that in the middle
of his body. To see him leap and run and pursue me over hedge and ditch was the worst
of nightmares. And altogether I paid pretty dear for my monthly fourpenny piece, in the
shape of these abominable fancies.
But though I was so terrified by the idea of the seafaring man with one leg, I was far
less afraid of the captain himself than anybody else who knew him. There were nights
when he took a deal more rum and water than his head would carry; and then he would
sometimes sit and sing his wicked, old, wild sea-songs, minding nobody; but sometimes
he would call for glasses round and force all the trembling company to listen to his
stories or bear a chorus to his singing. Often I have heard the house shaking with “Yo-
ho-ho, and a bottle of rum,” all the neighbours joining in for dear life, with the fear of
death upon them, and each singing louder than the other to avoid remark. For in these
fits he was the most overriding companion ever known; he would slap his hand on the
table for silence all round; he would fly up in a passion of anger at a question, or
sometimes because none was put, and so he judged the company was not following his
story. Nor would he allow anyone to leave the inn till he had drunk himself sleepy and
reeled off to bed.
His stories were what frightened people worst of all. Dreadful stories they were—
about hanging, and walking the plank, and storms at sea, and the Dry Tortugas, and wild
deeds and places on the Spanish Main. By his own account he must have lived his life
among some of the wickedest men that God ever allowed upon the sea, and the
language in which he told these stories shocked our plain country people almost as
much as the crimes that he described. My father was always saying the inn would be
ruined, for people would soon cease coming there to be tyrannized over and put down,
and sent shivering to their beds; but I really believe his presence did us good. People
were frightened at the time, but on looking back they rather liked it; it was a fine
excitement in a quiet country life, and there was even a party of the younger men who
pretended to admire him, calling him a “true sea-dog” and a “real old salt” and such like
names, and saying there was the sort of man that made England terrible at sea.

Treasure Island Page |8

 In one way, indeed, he bade fair to ruin us, for he kept on staying week after week,
and at last month after month, so that all the money had been long exhausted, and still
my father never plucked up the heart to insist on having more. If ever he mentioned it,
the captain blew through his nose so loudly that you might say he roared, and stared
my poor father out of the room. I have seen him wringing his hands after such a rebuff,
and I am sure the annoyance and the terror he lived in must have greatly hastened his
early and unhappy death.
All the time he lived with us the captain made no change whatever in his dress but to
buy some stockings from a hawker. One of the cocks of his hat having fallen down, he
let it hang from that day forth, though it was a great annoyance when it blew. I
remember the appearance of his coat, which he patched himself upstairs in his room,
and which, before the end, was nothing but patches. He never wrote or received a
letter, and he never spoke with any but the neighbours, and with these, for the most
part, only when drunk on rum. The great sea-chest none of us had ever seen open.
He was only once crossed, and that was towards the end, when my poor father was
far gone in a decline that took him off. Dr. Livesey came late one afternoon to see the
patient, took a bit of dinner from my mother, and went into the parlour to smoke a pipe
until his horse should come down from the hamlet, for we had no stabling at the old
Benbow. I followed him in, and I remember observing the contrast the neat, bright
doctor, with his powder as white as snow and his bright, black eyes and pleasant
manners, made with the coltish country folk, and above all, with that filthy, heavy,
bleared scarecrow of a pirate of ours, sitting, far gone in rum, with his arms on the table.
Suddenly he—the captain, that is—began to pipe up his eternal song:
“Fifteen men on the dead man’s chest—
Yo-ho-ho, and a bottle of rum!
Drink and the devil had done for the rest—
Yo-ho-ho, and a bottle of rum!”

At first I had supposed “the dead man’s chest” to be that identical big box of his
upstairs in the front room, and the thought had been mingled in my nightmares with
that of the one-legged seafaring man. But by this time we had all long ceased to pay
any particular notice to the song; it was new, that night, to nobody but Dr. Livesey, and
on him I observed it did not produce an agreeable effect, for he looked up for a moment
quite angrily before he went on with his talk to old Taylor, the gardener, on a new cure
for the rheumatics. In the meantime, the captain gradually brightened up at his own
music, and at last flapped his hand upon the table before him in a way we all knew to
mean silence. The voices stopped at once, all but Dr. Livesey’s; he went on as before

Treasure Island Page |9

speaking clear and kind and drawing briskly at his pipe between every word or two. The
captain glared at him for a while, flapped his hand again, glared still harder, and at last
broke out with a villainous, low oath, “Silence, there, between decks!”
“Were you addressing me, sir?” says the doctor; and when the ruffian had told him,
with another oath, that this was so, “I have only one thing to say to you, sir,” replies the
doctor, “that if you keep on drinking rum, the world will soon be quit of a very dirty
scoundrel!”
The old fellow’s fury was awful. He sprang to his feet, drew and opened a sailor’s
clasp-knife, and balancing it open on the palm of his hand, threatened to pin the doctor
to the wall.
The doctor never so much as moved. He spoke to him as before, over his shoulder
and in the same tone of voice, rather high, so that all the room might hear, but perfectly
calm and steady: “If you do not put that knife this instant in your pocket, I promise,
upon my honour, you shall hang at the next assizes.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 10
Treasure Island P a g e | 11
 Then followed a battle of looks between them, but the captain soon knuckled under,
put up his weapon, and resumed his seat, grumbling like a beaten dog.
“And now, sir,” continued the doctor, “since I now know there’s such a fellow in my
district, you may count I’ll have an eye upon you day and night. I’m not a doctor only;
I’m a magistrate; and if I catch a breath of complaint against you, if it’s only for a piece
of incivility like tonight’s, I’ll take effectual means to have you hunted down and routed
out of this. Let that suffice.”
Soon after, Dr. Livesey’s horse came to the door and he rode away, but the captain
held his peace that evening, and for many evenings to come.

Treasure Island P a g e | 12
 Black Dog Appears and Disappears
IT was not very long after this that there occurred the first of the mysterious events
that rid us at last of the captain, though not, as you will see, of his affairs. It was a bitter
cold winter, with long, hard frosts and heavy gales; and it was plain from the first that
my poor father was little likely to see the spring. He sank daily, and my mother and I
had all the inn upon our hands, and were kept busy enough without paying much regard
to our unpleasant guest.
It was one January morning, very early—a pinching, frosty morning—the cove all grey
with hoar-frost, the ripple lapping softly on the stones, the sun still low and only
touching the hilltops and shining far to seaward. The captain had risen earlier than usual
and set out down the beach, his cutlass swinging under the broad skirts of the old blue
coat, his brass telescope under his arm, his hat tilted back upon his head. I remember
his breath hanging like smoke in his wake as he strode off, and the last sound I heard of
him as he turned the big rock was a loud snort of indignation, as though his mind was
still running upon Dr. Livesey.
Well, mother was upstairs with father and I was laying the breakfast-table against the
captain’s return when the parlour door opened and a man stepped in on whom I had
never set my eyes before. He was a pale, tallowy creature, wanting two fingers of the
left hand, and though he wore a cutlass, he did not look much like a fighter. I had always

Treasure Island P a g e | 13
my eye open for seafaring men, with one leg or two, and I remember this one puzzled
me. He was not sailorly, and yet he had a smack of the sea about him too.
I asked him what was for his service, and he said he would take rum; but as I was
going out of the room to fetch it, he sat down upon a table and motioned me to draw
near. I paused where I was, with my napkin in my hand.
“Come here, sonny,” says he. “Come nearer here.”
I took a step nearer.
“Is this here table for my mate Bill?” he asked with a kind of leer.
I told him I did not know his mate Bill, and this was for a person who stayed in our
house whom we called the captain.
“Well,” said he, “my mate Bill would be called the captain, as like as not. He has a cut
on one cheek and a mighty pleasant way with him, particularly in drink, has my mate
Bill. We’ll put it, for argument like, that your captain has a cut on one cheek—and we’ll
put it, if you like, that that cheek’s the right one. Ah, well! I told you. Now, is my mate
Bill in this here house?”
I told him he was out walking.
“Which way, sonny? Which way is he gone?”
And when I had pointed out the rock and told him how the captain was likely to
return, and how soon, and answered a few other questions, “Ah,” said he, “this’ll be as
good as drink to my mate Bill.”
The expression of his face as he said these words was not at all pleasant, and I had
my own reasons for thinking that the stranger was mistaken, even supposing he meant
what he said. But it was no affair of mine, I thought; and besides, it was difficult to know
what to do. The stranger kept hanging about just inside the inn door, peering round the
corner like a cat waiting for a mouse. Once I stepped out myself into the road, but he
immediately called me back, and as I did not obey quick enough for his fancy, a most
horrible change came over his tallowy face, and he ordered me in with an oath that
made me jump. As soon as I was back again he returned to his former manner, half
fawning, half sneering, patted me on the shoulder, told me I was a good boy and he had
taken quite a fancy to me. “I have a son of my own,” said he, “as like you as two blocks,
and he’s all the pride of my ’art. But the great thing for boys is discipline, sonny—
discipline. Now, if you had sailed along of Bill, you wouldn’t have stood there to be
spoke to twice—not you. That was never Bill’s way, nor the way of sich as sailed with
him. And here, sure enough, is my mate Bill, with a spy-glass under his arm, bless his
old ’art, to be sure. You and me’ll just go back into the parlour, sonny, and get behind
the door, and we’ll give Bill a little surprise—bless his ’art, I say again.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 14
 So saying, the stranger backed along with me into the parlour and put me behind him
in the corner so that we were both hidden by the open door. I was very uneasy and
alarmed, as you may fancy, and it rather added to my fears to observe that the stranger
was certainly frightened himself. He cleared the hilt of his cutlass and loosened the
blade in the sheath; and all the time we were waiting there he kept swallowing as if he
felt what we used to call a lump in the throat.
At last in strode the captain, slammed the door behind him, without looking to the
right or left, and marched straight across the room to where his breakfast awaited him.
“Bill,” said the stranger in a voice that I thought he had tried to make bold and big.
The captain spun round on his heel and fronted us; all the brown had gone out of his
face, and even his nose was blue; he had the look of a man who sees a ghost, or the evil
one, or something worse, if anything can be; and upon my word, I felt sorry to see him
all in a moment turn so old and sick.
“Come, Bill, you know me; you know an old shipmate, Bill, surely,” said the stranger.
The captain made a sort of gasp.
“Black Dog!” said he.
“And who else?” returned the other, getting more at his ease. “Black Dog as ever was,
come for to see his old shipmate Billy, at the Admiral Benbow inn. Ah, Bill, Bill, we have
seen a sight of times, us two, since I lost them two talons,” holding up his mutilated
hand.
“Now, look here,” said the captain; “you’ve run me down; here I am; well, then, speak
up; what is it?”
“That’s you, Bill,” returned Black Dog, “you’re in the right of it, Billy. I’ll have a glass
of rum from this dear child here, as I’ve took such a liking to; and we’ll sit down, if you
please, and talk square, like old shipmates.”
When I returned with the rum, they were already seated on either side of the
captain’s breakfast-table—Black Dog next to the door and sitting sideways so as to have
one eye on his old shipmate and one, as I thought, on his retreat.
He bade me go and leave the door wide open. “None of your keyholes for me, sonny,”
he said; and I left them together and retired into the bar.
For a long time, though I certainly did my best to listen, I could hear nothing but a low
gattling; but at last the voices began to grow higher, and I could pick up a word or two,
mostly oaths, from the captain.
“No, no, no, no; and an end of it!” he cried once. And again, “If it comes to swinging,
swing all, say I.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 15
 Then all of a sudden there was a tremendous explosion of oaths and other noises—
the chair and table went over in a lump, a clash of steel followed, and then a cry of pain,
and the next instant I saw Black Dog in full flight, and the captain hotly pursuing, both
with drawn cutlasses, and the former streaming blood from the left shoulder. Just at
the door the captain aimed at the fugitive one last tremendous cut, which would

Treasure Island P a g e | 16
certainly have split him to the chine had it not been intercepted by our big signboard of
Admiral Benbow. You may see the notch on the lower side of the frame to this day.
That blow was the last of the battle. Once out upon the road, Black Dog, in spite of
his wound, showed a wonderful clean pair of heels and disappeared over the edge of
the hill in half a minute. The captain, for his part, stood staring at the signboard like a
bewildered man. Then he passed his hand over his eyes several times and at last turned
back into the house.
“Jim,” says he, “rum”; and as he spoke, he reeled a little, and caught himself with one
hand against the wall.
“Are you hurt?” cried I.
“Rum,” he repeated. “I must get away from here. Rum! Rum!”
I ran to fetch it, but I was quite unsteadied by all that had fallen out, and I broke one
glass and fouled the tap, and while I was still getting in my own way, I heard a loud fall
in the parlour, and running in, beheld the captain lying full length upon the floor. At the
same instant my mother, alarmed by the cries and fighting, came running downstairs
to help me. Between us we raised his head. He was breathing very loud and hard, but
his eyes were closed and his face a horrible colour.
“Dear, deary me,” cried my mother, “what a disgrace upon the house! And your poor
father sick!”
In the meantime, we had no idea what to do to help the captain, nor any other
thought but that he had got his death-hurt in the scuffle with the stranger. I got the
rum, to be sure, and tried to put it down his throat, but his teeth were tightly shut and
his jaws as strong as iron. It was a happy relief for us when the door opened and Doctor
Livesey came in, on his visit to my father.
“Oh, doctor,” we cried, “what shall we do? Where is he wounded?”
“Wounded? A fiddle-stick’s end!” said the doctor. “No more wounded than you or I.
The man has had a stroke, as I warned him. Now, Mrs. Hawkins, just you run upstairs to
your husband and tell him, if possible, nothing about it. For my part, I must do my best
to save this fellow’s trebly worthless life; Jim, you get me a basin.”
When I got back with the basin, the doctor had already ripped up the captain’s sleeve
and exposed his great sinewy arm. It was tattooed in several places. “Here’s luck,” “A
fair wind,” and “Billy Bones his fancy,” were very neatly and clearly executed on the
forearm; and up near the shoulder there was a sketch of a gallows and a man hanging
from it—done, as I thought, with great spirit.

Treasure Island P a g e | 17
 “Prophetic,” said the doctor, touching this picture with his finger. “And now, Master
Billy Bones, if that be your name, we’ll have a look at the colour of your blood. Jim,” he
said, “are you afraid of blood?”
“No, sir,” said I.
“Well, then,” said he, “you hold the basin”; and with that he took his lancet and
opened a vein.
A great deal of blood was taken before the captain opened his eyes and looked mistily
about him. First he recognized the doctor with an unmistakable frown; then his glance
fell upon me, and he looked relieved. But suddenly his colour changed, and he tried to
raise himself, crying, “Where’s Black Dog?”
“There is no Black Dog here,” said the doctor, “except what you have on your own
back. You have been drinking rum; you have had a stroke, precisely as I told you; and I
have just, very much against my own will, dragged you headforemost out of the grave.
Now, Mr. Bones—”
“That’s not my name,” he interrupted.
“Much I care,” returned the doctor. “It’s the name of a buccaneer of my
acquaintance; and I call you by it for the sake of shortness, and what I have to say to
you is this; one glass of rum won’t kill you, but if you take one you’ll take another and
another, and I stake my wig if you don’t break off short, you’ll die—do you understand
that?—die, and go to your own place, like the man in the Bible. Come, now, make an
effort. I’ll help you to your bed for once.”
Between us, with much trouble, we managed to hoist him upstairs, and laid him on
his bed, where his head fell back on the pillow as if he were almost fainting.
“Now, mind you,” said the doctor, “I clear my conscience—the name of rum for you
is death.”
And with that he went off to see my father, taking me with him by the arm.
“This is nothing,” he said as soon as he had closed the door. “I have drawn blood
enough to keep him quiet awhile; he should lie for a week where he is—that is the best
thing for him and you; but another stroke would settle him.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 18
 The Black Spot
ABOUT noon I stopped at the captain’s door with some cooling drinks and medicines.
He was lying very much as we had left him, only a little higher, and he seemed both
weak and excited.
“Jim,” he said, “you’re the only one here that’s worth anything, and you know I’ve
been always good to you. Never a month but I’ve given you a silver fourpenny for
yourself. And now you see, mate, I’m pretty low, and deserted by all; and Jim, you’ll
bring me one noggin of rum, now, won’t you, matey?”
“The doctor—” I began.
But he broke in cursing the doctor, in a feeble voice but heartily. “Doctors is all
swabs,” he said; “and that doctor there, why, what do he know about seafaring men? I
been in places hot as pitch, and mates dropping round with Yellow Jack, and the blessed
land a-heaving like the sea with earthquakes—what to the doctor know of lands like
that?—and I lived on rum, I tell you. It’s been meat and drink, and man and wife, to me;
and if I’m not to have my rum now I’m a poor old hulk on a lee shore, my blood’ll be on
you, Jim, and that doctor swab”; and he ran on again for a while with curses. “Look, Jim,
how my fingers fidges,” he continued in the pleading tone. “I can’t keep ’em still, not I.
I haven’t had a drop this blessed day. That doctor’s a fool, I tell you. If I don’t have a

Treasure Island P a g e | 19
dram o’ rum, Jim, I’ll have the horrors; I seen some on ’em already. I seen old Flint in
the corner there, behind you; as plain as print, I seen him; and if I get the horrors, I’m a
man that has lived rough, and I’ll raise Cain. Your doctor hisself said one glass wouldn’t
hurt me. I’ll give you a golden guinea for a noggin, Jim.”
He was growing more and more excited, and this alarmed me for my father, who was
very low that day and needed quiet; besides, I was reassured by the doctor’s words,
now quoted to me, and rather offended by the offer of a bribe.
“I want none of your money,” said I, “but what you owe my father. I’ll get you one
glass, and no more.”
When I brought it to him, he seized it greedily and drank it out.
“Aye, aye,” said he, “that’s some better, sure enough. And now, matey, did that
doctor say how long I was to lie here in this old berth?”
“A week at least,” said I.
“Thunder!” he cried. “A week! I can’t do that; they’d have the black spot on me by
then. The lubbers is going about to get the wind of me this blessed moment; lubbers as
couldn’t keep what they got, and want to nail what is another’s. Is that seamanly
behaviour, now, I want to know? But I’m a saving soul. I never wasted good money of
mine, nor lost it neither; and I’ll trick ’em again. I’m not afraid on ’em. I’ll shake out
another reef, matey, and daddle ’em again.”
As he was thus speaking, he had risen from bed with great difficulty, holding to my
shoulder with a grip that almost made me cry out, and moving his legs like so much
dead weight. His words, spirited as they were in meaning, contrasted sadly with the
weakness of the voice in which they were uttered. He paused when he had got into a
sitting position on the edge.
“That doctor’s done me,” he murmured. “My ears is singing. Lay me back.”
Before I could do much to help him he had fallen back again to his former place,
where he lay for a while silent.
“Jim,” he said at length, “you saw that seafaring man today?”
“Black Dog?” I asked.
“Ah! Black Dog,” says he. “He’s a bad un; but there’s worse that put him on. Now, if I
can’t get away nohow, and they tip me the black spot, mind you, it’s my old sea-chest
they’re after; you get on a horse—you can, can’t you? Well, then, you get on a horse,
and go to—well, yes, I will!—to that eternal doctor swab, and tell him to pipe all
hands—magistrates and sich—and he’ll lay ’em aboard at the Admiral Benbow—all old
Flint’s crew, man and boy, all on ’em that’s left. I was first mate, I was, old Flint’s first
mate, and I’m the on’y one as knows the place. He gave it me at Savannah, when he lay

Treasure Island P a g e | 20
a-dying, like as if I was to now, you see. But you won’t peach unless they get the black
spot on me, or unless you see that Black Dog again or a seafaring man with one leg,
Jim—him above all.”
“But what is the black spot, captain?” I asked.
“That’s a summons, mate. I’ll tell you if they get that. But you keep your weather-eye
open, Jim, and I’ll share with you equals, upon my honour.”
He wandered a little longer, his voice growing weaker; but soon after I had given him
his medicine, which he took like a child, with the remark, “If ever a seaman wanted
drugs, it’s me,” he fell at last into a heavy, swoon-like sleep, in which I left him. What I
should have done had all gone well I do not know. Probably I should have told the whole
story to the doctor, for I was in mortal fear lest the captain should repent of his
confessions and make an end of me. But as things fell out, my poor father died quite
suddenly that evening, which put all other matters on one side. Our natural distress,
the visits of the neighbours, the arranging of the funeral, and all the work of the inn to
be carried on in the meanwhile kept me so busy that I had scarcely time to think of the
captain, far less to be afraid of him.
He got downstairs next morning, to be sure, and had his meals as usual, though he
ate little and had more, I am afraid, than his usual supply of rum, for he helped himself
out of the bar, scowling and blowing through his nose, and no one dared to cross him.
On the night before the funeral he was as drunk as ever; and it was shocking, in that
house of mourning, to hear him singing away at his ugly old sea-song; but weak as he
was, we were all in the fear of death for him, and the doctor was suddenly taken up
with a case many miles away and was never near the house after my father’s death. I
have said the captain was weak, and indeed he seemed rather to grow weaker than
regain his strength. He clambered up and down stairs, and went from the parlour to the
bar and back again, and sometimes put his nose out of doors to smell the sea, holding
on to the walls as he went for support and breathing hard and fast like a man on a steep
mountain. He never particularly addressed me, and it is my belief he had as good as
forgotten his confidences; but his temper was more flighty, and allowing for his bodily
weakness, more violent than ever. He had an alarming way now when he was drunk of
drawing his cutlass and laying it bare before him on the table. But with all that, he
minded people less and seemed shut up in his own thoughts and rather wandering.
Once, for instance, to our extreme wonder, he piped up to a different air, a kind of
country love-song that he must have learned in his youth before he had begun to follow
the sea.
So things passed until, the day after the funeral, and about three o’clock of a bitter,
foggy, frosty afternoon, I was standing at the door for a moment, full of sad thoughts

Treasure Island P a g e | 21
about my father, when I saw someone drawing slowly near along the road. He was
plainly blind, for he tapped before him with a stick and wore a great green shade over
his eyes and nose; and he was hunched, as if with age or weakness, and wore a huge
old tattered sea-cloak with a hood that made him appear positively deformed. I never
saw in my life a more dreadful-looking figure. He stopped a little from the inn, and
raising his voice in an odd sing-song, addressed the air in front of him, “Will any kind
friend inform a poor blind man, who has lost the precious sight of his eyes in the
gracious defence of his native country, England—and God bless King George!—where
or in what part of this country he may now be?”
“You are at the Admiral Benbow, Black Hill Cove, my good man,” said I.
“I hear a voice,” said he, “a young voice. Will you give me your hand, my kind young
friend, and lead me in?”
I held out my hand, and the horrible, soft-spoken, eyeless creature gripped it in a
moment like a vise. I was so much startled that I struggled to withdraw, but the blind
man pulled me close up to him with a single action of his arm.
“Now, boy,” he said, “take me in to the captain.”
“Sir,” said I, “upon my word I dare not.”
“Oh,” he sneered, “that’s it! Take me in straight or I’ll break your arm.”
And he gave it, as he spoke, a wrench that made me cry out.
“Sir,” said I, “it is for yourself I mean. The captain is not what he used to be. He sits
with a drawn cutlass. Another gentleman—”
“Come, now, march,” interrupted he; and I never heard a voice so cruel, and cold,
and ugly as that blind man’s. It cowed me more than the pain, and I began to obey him
at once, walking straight in at the door and towards the parlour, where our sick old
buccaneer was sitting, dazed with rum. The blind man clung close to me, holding me in
one iron fist and leaning almost more of his weight on me than I could carry. “Lead me
straight up to him, and when I’m in view, cry out, ‘Here’s a friend for you, Bill.’ If you
don’t, I’ll do this,” and with that he gave me a twitch that I thought would have made
me faint. Between this and that, I was so utterly terrified of the blind beggar that I forgot
my terror of the captain, and as I opened the parlour door, cried out the words he had
ordered in a trembling voice.

Treasure Island P a g e | 22
 The poor captain raised his eyes, and at one look the rum went out of him and left
him staring sober. The expression of his face was not so much of terror as of mortal
sickness. He made a movement to rise, but I do not believe he had enough force left in
his body.
“Now, Bill, sit where you are,” said the beggar. “If I can’t see, I can hear a finger
stirring. Business is business. Hold out your left hand. Boy, take his left hand by the wrist
and bring it near to my right.”
We both obeyed him to the letter, and I saw him pass something from the hollow of
the hand that held his stick into the palm of the captain’s, which closed upon it instantly.
“And now that’s done,” said the blind man; and at the words he suddenly left hold of
me, and with incredible accuracy and nimbleness, skipped out of the parlour and into
the road, where, as I still stood motionless, I could hear his stick go tap-tap-tapping into
the distance.
It was some time before either I or the captain seemed to gather our senses, but at
length, and about at the same moment, I released his wrist, which I was still holding,
and he drew in his hand and looked sharply into the palm.

Treasure Island P a g e | 23
 “Ten o’clock!” he cried. “Six hours. We’ll do them yet,” and he sprang to his feet.
Even as he did so, he reeled, put his hand to his throat, stood swaying for a moment,
and then, with a peculiar sound, fell from his whole height face foremost to the floor.
I ran to him at once, calling to my mother. But haste was all in vain. The captain had
been struck dead by thundering apoplexy. It is a curious thing to understand, for I had
certainly never liked the man, though of late I had begun to pity him, but as soon as I
saw that he was dead, I burst into a flood of tears. It was the second death I had known,
and the sorrow of the first was still fresh in my heart.

Treasure Island P a g e | 24
 The Sea-Chest
I LOST no time, of course, in telling my mother all that I knew, and perhaps should
have told her long before, and we saw ourselves at once in a difficult and dangerous
position. Some of the man’s money—if he had any—was certainly due to us, but it was
not likely that our captain’s shipmates, above all the two specimens seen by me, Black
Dog and the blind beggar, would be inclined to give up their booty in payment of the
dead man’s debts. The captain’s order to mount at once and ride for Doctor Livesey
would have left my mother alone and unprotected, which was not to be thought of.
Indeed, it seemed impossible for either of us to remain much longer in the house; the
fall of coals in the kitchen grate, the very ticking of the clock, filled us with alarms. The
neighbourhood, to our ears, seemed haunted by approaching footsteps; and what
between the dead body of the captain on the parlour floor and the thought of that
detestable blind beggar hovering near at hand and ready to return, there were
moments when, as the saying goes, I jumped in my skin for terror. Something must
speedily be resolved upon, and it occurred to us at last to go forth together and seek
help in the neighbouring hamlet. No sooner said than done. Bare-headed as we were,
we ran out at once in the gathering evening and the frosty fog.
The hamlet lay not many hundred yards away, though out of view, on the other side
of the next cove; and what greatly encouraged me, it was in an opposite direction from
that whence the blind man had made his appearance and whither he had presumably

Treasure Island P a g e | 25
returned. We were not many minutes on the road, though we sometimes stopped to
lay hold of each other and hearken. But there was no unusual sound—nothing but the
low wash of the ripple and the croaking of the inmates of the wood.
It was already candle-light when we reached the hamlet, and I shall never forget how
much I was cheered to see the yellow shine in doors and windows; but that, as it proved,
was the best of the help we were likely to get in that quarter. For—you would have
thought men would have been ashamed of themselves—no soul would consent to
return with us to the Admiral Benbow. The more we told of our troubles, the more—
man, woman, and child—they clung to the shelter of their houses. The name of Captain
Flint, though it was strange to me, was well enough known to some there and carried a
great weight of terror. Some of the men who had been to field-work on the far side of
the Admiral Benbow remembered, besides, to have seen several strangers on the road,
and taking them to be smugglers, to have bolted away; and one at least had seen a little
lugger in what we called Kitt’s Hole. For that matter, anyone who was a comrade of the
captain’s was enough to frighten them to death. And the short and the long of the
matter was, that while we could get several who were willing enough to ride to Dr.
Livesey’s, which lay in another direction, not one would help us to defend the inn.
They say cowardice is infectious; but then argument is, on the other hand, a great
emboldener; and so when each had said his say, my mother made them a speech. She
would not, she declared, lose money that belonged to her fatherless boy; “If none of
the rest of you dare,” she said, “Jim and I dare. Back we will go, the way we came, and
small thanks to you big, hulking, chicken-hearted men. We’ll have that chest open, if
we die for it. And I’ll thank you for that bag, Mrs. Crossley, to bring back our lawful
money in.”
Of course I said I would go with my mother, and of course they all cried out at our
foolhardiness, but even then not a man would go along with us. All they would do was
to give me a loaded pistol lest we were attacked, and to promise to have horses ready
saddled in case we were pursued on our return, while one lad was to ride forward to
the doctor’s in search of armed assistance.
My heart was beating finely when we two set forth in the cold night upon this
dangerous venture. A full moon was beginning to rise and peered redly through the
upper edges of the fog, and this increased our haste, for it was plain, before we came
forth again, that all would be as bright as day, and our departure exposed to the eyes
of any watchers. We slipped along the hedges, noiseless and swift, nor did we see or
hear anything to increase our terrors, till, to our relief, the door of the Admiral Benbow
had closed behind us.

Treasure Island P a g e | 26
 I slipped the bolt at once, and we stood and panted for a moment in the dark, alone
in the house with the dead captain’s body. Then my mother got a candle in the bar, and
holding each other’s hands, we advanced into the parlour. He lay as we had left him, on
his back, with his eyes open and one arm stretched out.
“Draw down the blind, Jim,” whispered my mother; “they might come and watch
outside. And now,” said she when I had done so, “we have to get the key off that; and
who’s to touch it, I should like to know!” and she gave a kind of sob as she said the
words.
I went down on my knees at once. On the floor close to his hand there was a little
round of paper, blackened on the one side. I could not doubt that this was the black
spot; and taking it up, I found written on the other side, in a very good, clear hand, this
short message: “You have till ten tonight.”
“He had till ten, Mother,” said I; and just as I said it, our old clock began striking. This
sudden noise startled us shockingly; but the news was good, for it was only six.
“Now, Jim,” she said, “that key.”
I felt in his pockets, one after another. A few small coins, a thimble, and some thread
and big needles, a piece of pigtail tobacco bitten away at the end, his gully with the
crooked handle, a pocket compass, and a tinder box were all that they contained, and I
began to despair.
“Perhaps it’s round his neck,” suggested my mother.
Overcoming a strong repugnance, I tore open his shirt at the neck, and there, sure
enough, hanging to a bit of tarry string, which I cut with his own gully, we found the
key. At this triumph we were filled with hope and hurried upstairs without delay to the
little room where he had slept so long and where his box had stood since the day of his
arrival.
It was like any other seaman’s chest on the outside, the initial “B” burned on the top
of it with a hot iron, and the corners somewhat smashed and broken as by long, rough
usage.
“Give me the key,” said my mother; and though the lock was very stiff, she had turned
it and thrown back the lid in a twinkling.
A strong smell of tobacco and tar rose from the interior, but nothing was to be seen
on the top except a suit of very good clothes, carefully brushed and folded. They had
never been worn, my mother said. Under that, the miscellany began—a quadrant, a tin
canikin, several sticks of tobacco, two brace of very handsome pistols, a piece of bar
silver, an old Spanish watch and some other trinkets of little value and mostly of foreign
make, a pair of compasses mounted with brass, and five or six curious West Indian

Treasure Island P a g e | 27
shells. I have often wondered since why he should have carried about these shells with
him in his wandering, guilty, and hunted life.
In the meantime, we had found nothing of any value but the silver and the trinkets,
and neither of these were in our way. Underneath there was an old boat-cloak,
whitened with sea-salt on many a harbour-bar. My mother pulled it up with impatience,
and there lay before us, the last things in the chest, a bundle tied up in oilcloth, and
looking like papers, and a canvas bag that gave forth, at a touch, the jingle of gold.
“I’ll show these rogues that I’m an honest woman,” said my mother. “I’ll have my
dues, and not a farthing over. Hold Mrs. Crossley’s bag.” And she began to count over
the amount of the captain’s score from the sailor’s bag into the one that I was holding.

Treasure Island P a g e | 28
Treasure Island P a g e | 29
 It was a long, difficult business, for the coins were of all countries and sizes—
doubloons, and louis d’ors, and guineas, and pieces of eight, and I know not what
besides, all shaken together at random. The guineas, too, were about the scarcest, and
it was with these only that my mother knew how to make her count.
When we were about half-way through, I suddenly put my hand upon her arm, for I
had heard in the silent frosty air a sound that brought my heart into my mouth—the
tap-tapping of the blind man’s stick upon the frozen road. It drew nearer and nearer,
while we sat holding our breath. Then it struck sharp on the inn door, and then we could
hear the handle being turned and the bolt rattling as the wretched being tried to enter;
and then there was a long time of silence both within and without. At last the tapping
recommenced, and, to our indescribable joy and gratitude, died slowly away again until
it ceased to be heard.
“Mother,” said I, “take the whole and let’s be going,” for I was sure the bolted door
must have seemed suspicious and would bring the whole hornet’s nest about our ears,
though how thankful I was that I had bolted it, none could tell who had never met that
terrible blind man.
But my mother, frightened as she was, would not consent to take a fraction more
than was due to her and was obstinately unwilling to be content with less. It was not
yet seven, she said, by a long way; she knew her rights and she would have them; and
she was still arguing with me when a little low whistle sounded a good way off upon the
hill. That was enough, and more than enough, for both of us.
“I’ll take what I have,” she said, jumping to her feet.
“And I’ll take this to square the count,” said I, picking up the oilskin packet.
Next moment we were both groping downstairs, leaving the candle by the empty
chest; and the next we had opened the door and were in full retreat. We had not started
a moment too soon. The fog was rapidly dispersing; already the moon shone quite clear
on the high ground on either side; and it was only in the exact bottom of the dell and
round the tavern door that a thin veil still hung unbroken to conceal the first steps of
our escape. Far less than half-way to the hamlet, very little beyond the bottom of the
hill, we must come forth into the moonlight. Nor was this all, for the sound of several
footsteps running came already to our ears, and as we looked back in their direction, a
light tossing to and fro and still rapidly advancing showed that one of the newcomers
carried a lantern.
“My dear,” said my mother suddenly, “take the money and run on. I am going to
faint.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 30
 This was certainly the end for both of us, I thought. How I cursed the cowardice of
the neighbours; how I blamed my poor mother for her honesty and her greed, for her
past foolhardiness and present weakness! We were just at the little bridge, by good
fortune; and I helped her, tottering as she was, to the edge of the bank, where, sure
enough, she gave a sigh and fell on my shoulder. I do not know how I found the strength
to do it at all, and I am afraid it was roughly done, but I managed to drag her down the
bank and a little way under the arch. Farther I could not move her, for the bridge was
too low to let me do more than crawl below it. So there we had to stay—my mother
almost entirely exposed and both of us within earshot of the inn.

Treasure Island P a g e | 31
 The Last of the Blind Man
MY curiosity, in a sense, was stronger than my fear, for I could not remain where I was,
but crept back to the bank again, whence, sheltering my head behind a bush of broom,
I might command the road before our door. I was scarcely in position ere my enemies
began to arrive, seven or eight of them, running hard, their feet beating out of time
along the road and the man with the lantern some paces in front. Three men ran
together, hand in hand; and I made out, even through the mist, that the middle man of
this trio was the blind beggar. The next moment his voice showed me that I was right.

“Down with the door!” he cried.

“Aye, aye, sir!” answered two or three; and a rush was made upon the Admiral
Benbow, the lantern-bearer following; and then I could see them pause, and hear
speeches passed in a lower key, as if they were surprised to find the door open. But the
pause was brief, for the blind man again issued his commands. His voice sounded louder
and higher, as if he were afire with eagerness and rage.
“In, in, in!” he shouted, and cursed them for their delay.

Treasure Island P a g e | 32
 Four or five of them obeyed at once, two remaining on the road with the formidable
beggar. There was a pause, then a cry of surprise, and then a voice shouting from the
house, “Bill’s dead.”
But the blind man swore at them again for their delay.
“Search him, some of you shirking lubbers, and the rest of you aloft and get the
chest,” he cried.
I could hear their feet rattling up our old stairs, so that the house must have shook
with it. Promptly afterwards, fresh sounds of astonishment arose; the window of the
captain’s room was thrown open with a slam and a jingle of broken glass, and a man
leaned out into the moonlight, head and shoulders, and addressed the blind beggar on
the road below him.
“Pew,” he cried, “they’ve been before us. Someone’s turned the chest out alow and
aloft.”
“Is it there?” roared Pew.
“The money’s there.”
The blind man cursed the money.
“Flint’s fist, I mean,” he cried.
“We don’t see it here nohow,” returned the man.
“Here, you below there, is it on Bill?” cried the blind man again.
At that another fellow, probably him who had remained below to search the captain’s
body, came to the door of the inn. “Bill’s been overhauled a’ready,” said he; “nothin’
left.”
“It’s these people of the inn—it’s that boy. I wish I had put his eyes out!” cried the
blind man, Pew. “There were no time ago—they had the door bolted when I tried it.
Scatter, lads, and find ’em.”
“Sure enough, they left their glim here,” said the fellow from the window.
“Scatter and find ’em! Rout the house out!” reiterated Pew, striking with his stick
upon the road.
Then there followed a great to-do through all our old inn, heavy feet pounding to and
fro, furniture thrown over, doors kicked in, until the very rocks re-echoed and the men
came out again, one after another, on the road and declared that we were nowhere to
be found. And just the same whistle that had alarmed my mother and myself over the
dead captain’s money was once more clearly audible through the night, but this time
twice repeated. I had thought it to be the blind man’s trumpet, so to speak, summoning
his crew to the assault, but I now found that it was a signal from the hillside towards

Treasure Island P a g e | 33
the hamlet, and from its effect upon the buccaneers, a signal to warn them of
approaching danger.
“There’s Dirk again,” said one. “Twice! We’ll have to budge, mates.”
“Budge, you skulk!” cried Pew. “Dirk was a fool and a coward from the first—you
wouldn’t mind him. They must be close by; they can’t be far; you have your hands on
it. Scatter and look for them, dogs! Oh, shiver my soul,” he cried, “if I had eyes!”
This appeal seemed to produce some effect, for two of the fellows began to look here
and there among the lumber, but half-heartedly, I thought, and with half an eye to their
own danger all the time, while the rest stood irresolute on the road.
“You have your hands on thousands, you fools, and you hang a leg! You’d be as rich
as kings if you could find it, and you know it’s here, and you stand there skulking. There
wasn’t one of you dared face Bill, and I did it—a blind man! And I’m to lose my chance
for you! I’m to be a poor, crawling beggar, sponging for rum, when I might be rolling in
a coach! If you had the pluck of a weevil in a biscuit you would catch them still.”
“Hang it, Pew, we’ve got the doubloons!” grumbled one.
“They might have hid the blessed thing,” said another. “Take the Georges, Pew, and
don’t stand here squalling.”
Squalling was the word for it; Pew’s anger rose so high at these objections till at last,
his passion completely taking the upper hand, he struck at them right and left in his
blindness and his stick sounded heavily on more than one.

Treasure Island P a g e | 34
 These, in their turn, cursed back at the blind miscreant, threatened him in horrid
terms, and tried in vain to catch the stick and wrest it from his grasp.
This quarrel was the saving of us, for while it was still raging, another sound came
from the top of the hill on the side of the hamlet—the tramp of horses galloping. Almost
at the same time a pistol-shot, flash and report, came from the hedge side. And that
was plainly the last signal of danger, for the buccaneers turned at once and ran,
separating in every direction, one seaward along the cove, one slant across the hill, and
so on, so that in half a minute not a sign of them remained but Pew. Him they had
deserted, whether in sheer panic or out of revenge for his ill words and blows I know
not; but there he remained behind, tapping up and down the road in a frenzy, and
groping and calling for his comrades. Finally he took a wrong turn and ran a few steps
past me, towards the hamlet, crying, “Johnny, Black Dog, Dirk,” and other names, “you
won’t leave old Pew, mates—not old Pew!”
Just then the noise of horses topped the rise, and four or five riders came in sight in
the moonlight and swept at full gallop down the slope.
At this Pew saw his error, turned with a scream, and ran straight for the ditch, into
which he rolled. But he was on his feet again in a second and made another dash, now
utterly bewildered, right under the nearest of the coming horses.
The rider tried to save him, but in vain. Down went Pew with a cry that rang high into
the night; and the four hoofs trampled and spurned him and passed by. He fell on his
side, then gently collapsed upon his face and moved no more.
I leaped to my feet and hailed the riders. They were pulling up, at any rate, horrified
at the accident; and I soon saw what they were. One, tailing out behind the rest, was a
lad that had gone from the hamlet to Dr. Livesey’s; the rest were revenue officers,
whom he had met by the way, and with whom he had had the intelligence to return at
once. Some news of the lugger in Kitt’s Hole had found its way to Supervisor Dance and
set him forth that night in our direction, and to that circumstance my mother and I owed
our preservation from death.
Pew was dead, stone dead. As for my mother, when we had carried her up to the
hamlet, a little cold water and salts and that soon brought her back again, and she was
none the worse for her terror, though she still continued to deplore the balance of the
money. In the meantime the supervisor rode on, as fast as he could, to Kitt’s Hole; but
his men had to dismount and grope down the dingle, leading, and sometimes
supporting, their horses, and in continual fear of ambushes; so it was no great matter
for surprise that when they got down to the Hole the lugger was already under way,
though still close in. He hailed her. A voice replied, telling him to keep out of the
moonlight or he would get some lead in him, and at the same time a bullet whistled

Treasure Island P a g e | 35
close by his arm. Soon after, the lugger doubled the point and disappeared. Mr. Dance
stood there, as he said, “like a fish out of water,” and all he could do was to dispatch a
man to B—— to warn the cutter. “And that,” said he, “is just about as good as nothing.
They’ve got off clean, and there’s an end. Only,” he added, “I’m glad I trod on Master
Pew’s corns,” for by this time he had heard my story.
I went back with him to the Admiral Benbow, and you cannot imagine a house in such
a state of smash; the very clock had been thrown down by these fellows in their furious
hunt after my mother and myself; and though nothing had actually been taken away
except the captain’s money-bag and a little silver from the till, I could see at once that
we were ruined. Mr. Dance could make nothing of the scene.
“They got the money, you say? Well, then, Hawkins, what in fortune were they after?
More money, I suppose?”
“No, sir; not money, I think,” replied I. “In fact, sir, I believe I have the thing in my
breast pocket; and to tell you the truth, I should like to get it put in safety.”
“To be sure, boy; quite right,” said he. “I’ll take it, if you like.”
“I thought perhaps Dr. Livesey—” I began.
“Perfectly right,” he interrupted very cheerily, “perfectly right—a gentleman and a
magistrate. And, now I come to think of it, I might as well ride round there myself and
report to him or squire. Master Pew’s dead, when all’s done; not that I regret it, but
he’s dead, you see, and people will make it out against an officer of his Majesty’s
revenue, if make it out they can. Now, I’ll tell you, Hawkins, if you like, I’ll take you
along.”
I thanked him heartily for the offer, and we walked back to the hamlet where the
horses were. By the time I had told mother of my purpose they were all in the saddle.
“Dogger,” said Mr. Dance, “you have a good horse; take up this lad behind you.”
As soon as I was mounted, holding on to Dogger’s belt, the supervisor gave the word,
and the party struck out at a bouncing trot on the road to Dr. Livesey’s house.

Treasure Island P a g e | 36
 The Captain’s Papers
WE rode hard all the way till we drew up before Dr. Livesey’s door. The house was all
dark to the front.
Mr. Dance told me to jump down and knock, and Dogger gave me a stirrup to descend
by. The door was opened almost at once by the maid.
“Is Dr. Livesey in?” I asked.
No, she said, he had come home in the afternoon but had gone up to the hall to dine
and pass the evening with the squire.
“So there we go, boys,” said Mr. Dance.
This time, as the distance was short, I did not mount, but ran with Dogger’s stirrup-
leather to the lodge gates and up the long, leafless, moonlit avenue to where the white
line of the hall buildings looked on either hand on great old gardens. Here Mr. Dance
dismounted, and taking me along with him, was admitted at a word into the house.
The servant led us down a matted passage and showed us at the end into a great
library, all lined with bookcases and busts upon the top of them, where the squire and
Dr. Livesey sat, pipe in hand, on either side of a bright fire.
I had never seen the squire so near at hand. He was a tall man, over six feet high, and
broad in proportion, and he had a bluff, rough-and-ready face, all roughened and

Treasure Island P a g e | 37
reddened and lined in his long travels. His eyebrows were very black, and moved
readily, and this gave him a look of some temper, not bad, you would say, but quick and
high.
“Come in, Mr. Dance,” says he, very stately and condescending.
“Good evening, Dance,” says the doctor with a nod. “And good evening to you, friend
Jim. What good wind brings you here?”
The supervisor stood up straight and stiff and told his story like a lesson; and you
should have seen how the two gentlemen leaned forward and looked at each other,
and forgot to smoke in their surprise and interest. When they heard how my mother
went back to the inn, Dr. Livesey fairly slapped his thigh, and the squire cried “Bravo!”
and broke his long pipe against the grate. Long before it was done, Mr. Trelawney (that,
you will remember, was the squire’s name) had got up from his seat and was striding
about the room, and the doctor, as if to hear the better, had taken off his powdered
wig and sat there looking very strange indeed with his own close-cropped black poll.
At last Mr. Dance finished the story.
“Mr. Dance,” said the squire, “you are a very noble fellow. And as for riding down
that black, atrocious miscreant, I regard it as an act of virtue, sir, like stamping on a
cockroach. This lad Hawkins is a trump, I perceive. Hawkins, will you ring that bell? Mr.
Dance must have some ale.”
“And so, Jim,” said the doctor, “you have the thing that they were after, have you?”
“Here it is, sir,” said I, and gave him the oilskin packet.
The doctor looked it all over, as if his fingers were itching to open it; but instead of
doing that, he put it quietly in the pocket of his coat.
“Squire,” said he, “when Dance has had his ale he must, of course, be off on his
Majesty’s service; but I mean to keep Jim Hawkins here to sleep at my house, and with
your permission, I propose we should have up the cold pie and let him sup.”
“As you will, Livesey,” said the squire; “Hawkins has earned better than cold pie.”
So a big pigeon pie was brought in and put on a sidetable, and I made a hearty supper,
for I was as hungry as a hawk, while Mr. Dance was further complimented and at last
dismissed.
“And now, squire,” said the doctor.
“And now, Livesey,” said the squire in the same breath.
“One at a time, one at a time,” laughed Dr. Livesey. “You have heard of this Flint, I
suppose?”

Treasure Island P a g e | 38
 “Heard of him!” cried the squire. “Heard of him, you say! He was the bloodthirstiest
buccaneer that sailed. Blackbeard was a child to Flint. The Spaniards were so
prodigiously afraid of him that, I tell you, sir, I was sometimes proud he was an
Englishman. I’ve seen his top-sails with these eyes, off Trinidad, and the cowardly son
of a rum-puncheon that I sailed with put back—put back, sir, into Port of Spain.”
“Well, I’ve heard of him myself, in England,” said the doctor. “But the point is, had he
money?”
“Money!” cried the squire. “Have you heard the story? What were these villains after
but money? What do they care for but money? For what would they risk their rascal
carcasses but money?”
“That we shall soon know,” replied the doctor. “But you are so confoundedly hot-
headed and exclamatory that I cannot get a word in. What I want to know is this:
Supposing that I have here in my pocket some clue to where Flint buried his treasure,
will that treasure amount to much?”
“Amount, sir!” cried the squire. “It will amount to this: If we have the clue you talk
about, I fit out a ship in Bristol dock, and take you and Hawkins here along, and I’ll have
that treasure if I search a year.”
“Very well,” said the doctor. “Now, then, if Jim is agreeable, we’ll open the packet”;
and he laid it before him on the table.
The bundle was sewn together, and the doctor had to get out his instrument case and
cut the stitches with his medical scissors. It contained two things—a book and a sealed
paper.
“First of all we’ll try the book,” observed the doctor.
The squire and I were both peering over his shoulder as he opened it, for Dr. Livesey
had kindly motioned me to come round from the side-table, where I had been eating,
to enjoy the sport of the search. On the first page there were only some scraps of
writing, such as a man with a pen in his hand might make for idleness or practice. One
was the same as the tattoo mark, “Billy Bones his fancy”; then there was “Mr. W. Bones,
mate,” “No more rum,” “Off Palm Key he got itt,” and some other snatches, mostly
single words and unintelligible. I could not help wondering who it was that had “got itt,”
and what “itt” was that he got. A knife in his back as like as not.
“Not much instruction there,” said Dr. Livesey as he passed on.
The next ten or twelve pages were filled with a curious series of entries. There was a
date at one end of the line and at the other a sum of money, as in common account-
books, but instead of explanatory writing, only a varying number of crosses between
the two. On the 12th of June, 1745, for instance, a sum of seventy pounds had plainly

Treasure Island P a g e | 39
become due to someone, and there was nothing but six crosses to explain the cause. In
a few cases, to be sure, the name of a place would be added, as “Offe Caraccas,” or a
mere entry of latitude and longitude, as “62° 17′ 20″, 19° 2′ 40″.”
The record lasted over nearly twenty years, the amount of the separate entries
growing larger as time went on, and at the end a grand total had been made out after
five or six wrong additions, and these words appended, “Bones, his pile.”
“I can’t make head or tail of this,” said Dr. Livesey.
“The thing is as clear as noonday,” cried the squire. “This is the black-hearted hound’s
account-book. These crosses stand for the names of ships or towns that they sank or
plundered. The sums are the scoundrel’s share, and where he feared an ambiguity, you
see he added something clearer. ‘Offe Caraccas,’ now; you see, here was some unhappy
vessel boarded off that coast. God help the poor souls that manned her—coral long
ago.”
“Right!” said the doctor. “See what it is to be a traveller. Right! And the amounts
increase, you see, as he rose in rank.”
There was little else in the volume but a few bearings of places noted in the blank
leaves towards the end and a table for reducing French, English, and Spanish moneys
to a common value.
“Thrifty man!” cried the doctor. “He wasn’t the one to be cheated.”
“And now,” said the squire, “for the other.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 40
Treasure Island P a g e | 41
 The paper had been sealed in several places with a thimble by way of seal; the very
thimble, perhaps, that I had found in the captain’s pocket. The doctor opened the seals
with great care, and there fell out the map of an island, with latitude and longitude,
soundings, names of hills and bays and inlets, and every particular that would be
needed to bring a ship to a safe anchorage upon its shores. It was about nine miles long
and five across, shaped, you might say, like a fat dragon standing up, and had two fine
land-locked harbours, and a hill in the centre part marked “The Spy-glass.” There were
several additions of a later date, but above all, three crosses of red ink—two on the
north part of the island, one in the southwest—and beside this last, in the same red ink,
and in a small, neat hand, very different from the captain’s tottery characters, these
words: “Bulk of treasure here.”
Over on the back the same hand had written this further information:
Tall tree, Spy-glass shoulder, bearing a point to the N. of N.N.E.
Skeleton Island E.S.E. and by E.
Ten feet.
The bar silver is in the north cache; you can find it by the trend of the east
hummock, ten fathoms south of the black crag with the face on it.
The arms are easy found, in the sand-hill, N. point of north inlet cape, bearing E.
and a quarter N.
J.F.
That was all; but brief as it was, and to me incomprehensible, it filled the squire and
Dr. Livesey with delight.
“Livesey,” said the squire, “you will give up this wretched practice at once. Tomorrow
I start for Bristol. In three weeks’ time—three weeks!—two weeks—ten days—we’ll
have the best ship, sir, and the choicest crew in England. Hawkins shall come as cabin-
boy. You’ll make a famous cabin-boy, Hawkins. You, Livesey, are ship’s doctor; I am
admiral. We’ll take Redruth, Joyce, and Hunter. We’ll have favourable winds, a quick
passage, and not the least difficulty in finding the spot, and money to eat, to roll in, to
play duck and drake with ever after.”
“Trelawney,” said the doctor, “I’ll go with you; and I’ll go bail for it, so will Jim, and be
a credit to the undertaking. There’s only one man I’m afraid of.”
“And who’s that?” cried the squire. “Name the dog, sir!”
“You,” replied the doctor; “for you cannot hold your tongue. We are not the only men
who know of this paper. These fellows who attacked the inn tonight—bold, desperate
blades, for sure—and the rest who stayed aboard that lugger, and more, I dare say, not

Treasure Island P a g e | 42
far off, are, one and all, through thick and thin, bound that they’ll get that money. We
must none of us go alone till we get to sea. Jim and I shall stick together in the
meanwhile; you’ll take Joyce and Hunter when you ride to Bristol, and from first to last,
not one of us must breathe a word of what we’ve found.”
“Livesey,” returned the squire, “you are always in the right of it. I’ll be as silent as the
grave.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 43
 PART TWO — THE SEA-COOK

I Go To Bristol
IT was longer than the squire imagined ere we were ready for the sea, and none of
our first plans—not even Dr. Livesey’s, of keeping me beside him—could be carried out
as we intended. The doctor had to go to London for a physician to take charge of his
practice; the squire was hard at work at Bristol; and I lived on at the hall under the
charge of old Redruth, the gamekeeper, almost a prisoner, but full of sea-dreams and
the most charming anticipations of strange islands and adventures. I brooded by the
hour together over the map, all the details of which I well remembered. Sitting by the
fire in the housekeeper’s room, I approached that island in my fancy from every possible
direction; I explored every acre of its surface; I climbed a thousand times to that tall hill
they call the Spy-glass, and from the top enjoyed the most wonderful and changing
prospects. Sometimes the isle was thick with savages, with whom we fought,
sometimes full of dangerous animals that hunted us, but in all my fancies nothing
occurred to me so strange and tragic as our actual adventures.
So the weeks passed on, till one fine day there came a letter addressed to Dr. Livesey,
with this addition, “To be opened, in the case of his absence, by Tom Redruth or young
Hawkins.” Obeying this order, we found, or rather I found—for the gamekeeper was a
poor hand at reading anything but print—the following important news:

Treasure Island P a g e | 44
 Old Anchor Inn, Bristol, March 1, 17—
Dear Livesey—As I do not know whether you are at the hall or still in London, I send
this in double to both places.
The ship is bought and fitted. She lies at anchor, ready for sea. You never imagined
a sweeter schooner—a child might sail her—two hundred tons; name, Hispaniola.
I got her through my old friend, Blandly, who has proved himself throughout the
most surprising trump. The admirable fellow literally slaved in my interest, and so, I
may say, did everyone in Bristol, as soon as they got wind of the port we sailed for—
treasure, I mean.
“Redruth,” said I, interrupting the letter, “Dr. Livesey will not like that. The squire
has been talking, after all.”
“Well, who’s a better right?” growled the gamekeeper. “A pretty rum go if squire
ain’t to talk for Dr. Livesey, I should think.”
At that I gave up all attempts at commentary and read straight on:
Blandly himself found the Hispaniola, and by the most admirable management got
her for the merest trifle. There is a class of men in Bristol monstrously prejudiced
against Blandly. They go the length of declaring that this honest creature would do
anything for money, that the Hispaniola belonged to him, and that he sold it me
absurdly high—the most transparent calumnies. None of them dare, however, to
deny the merits of the ship.
So far there was not a hitch. The workpeople, to be sure—riggers and what not—
were most annoyingly slow; but time cured that. It was the crew that troubled me.
I wished a round score of men—in case of natives, buccaneers, or the odious
French—and I had the worry of the deuce itself to find so much as half a dozen, till
the most remarkable stroke of fortune brought me the very man that I required.
I was standing on the dock, when, by the merest accident, I fell in talk with him. I
found he was an old sailor, kept a public-house, knew all the seafaring men in Bristol,
had lost his health ashore, and wanted a good berth as cook to get to sea again. He
had hobbled down there that morning, he said, to get a smell of the salt.
I was monstrously touched—so would you have been—and, out of pure pity, I
engaged him on the spot to be ship’s cook. Long John Silver, he is called, and has lost
a leg; but that I regarded as a recommendation, since he lost it in his country’s
service, under the immortal Hawke. He has no pension, Livesey. Imagine the
abominable age we live in!

Treasure Island P a g e | 45
 Well, sir, I thought I had only found a cook, but it was a crew I had discovered.
Between Silver and myself we got together in a few days a company of the toughest
old salts imaginable—not pretty to look at, but fellows, by their faces, of the most
indomitable spirit. I declare we could fight a frigate.
Long John even got rid of two out of the six or seven I had already engaged. He
showed me in a moment that they were just the sort of fresh-water swabs we had to
fear in an adventure of importance.
I am in the most magnificent health and spirits, eating like a bull, sleeping like a
tree, yet I shall not enjoy a moment till I hear my old tarpaulins tramping round the
capstan. Seaward, ho! Hang the treasure! It’s the glory of the sea that has turned my
head. So now, Livesey, come post; do not lose an hour, if you respect me.
Let young Hawkins go at once to see his mother, with Redruth for a guard; and
then both come full speed to Bristol.
John Trelawney

Postscript—I did not tell you that Blandly, who, by the way, is to send a consort
after us if we don’t turn up by the end of August, had found an admirable fellow for
sailing master—a stiff man, which I regret, but in all other respects a treasure. Long
John Silver unearthed a very competent man for a mate, a man named Arrow. I have
a boatswain who pipes, Livesey; so things shall go man-o’-war fashion on board the
good ship Hispaniola.
I forgot to tell you that Silver is a man of substance; I know of my own knowledge
that he has a banker’s account, which has never been overdrawn. He leaves his wife
to manage the inn; and as she is a woman of colour, a pair of old bachelors like you
and I may be excused for guessing that it is the wife, quite as much as the health,
that sends him back to roving.
J. T.

P.P.S.—Hawkins may stay one night with his mother.

J. T.
You can fancy the excitement into which that letter put me. I was half beside myself
with glee; and if ever I despised a man, it was old Tom Redruth, who could do nothing
but grumble and lament. Any of the under-gamekeepers would gladly have changed
places with him; but such was not the squire’s pleasure, and the squire’s pleasure was

Treasure Island P a g e | 46
like law among them all. Nobody but old Redruth would have dared so much as even to
grumble.
The next morning he and I set out on foot for the Admiral Benbow, and there I found
my mother in good health and spirits. The captain, who had so long been a cause of so
much discomfort, was gone where the wicked cease from troubling. The squire had had
everything repaired, and the public rooms and the sign repainted, and had added some
furniture—above all a beautiful armchair for mother in the bar. He had found her a boy
as an apprentice also so that she should not want help while I was gone.
It was on seeing that boy that I understood, for the first time, my situation. I had
thought up to that moment of the adventures before me, not at all of the home that I
was leaving; and now, at sight of this clumsy stranger, who was to stay here in my place
beside my mother, I had my first attack of tears. I am afraid I led that boy a dog’s life,
for as he was new to the work, I had a hundred opportunities of setting him right and
putting him down, and I was not slow to profit by them.

Treasure Island P a g e | 47
Treasure Island P a g e | 48
 The night passed, and the next day, after dinner, Redruth and I were afoot again and
on the road. I said good-bye to Mother and the cove where I had lived since I was born,
and the dear old Admiral Benbow—since he was repainted, no longer quite so dear.
One of my last thoughts was of the captain, who had so often strode along the beach
with his cocked hat, his sabre-cut cheek, and his old brass telescope. Next moment we
had turned the corner and my home was out of sight.
The mail picked us up about dusk at the Royal George on the heath. I was wedged in
between Redruth and a stout old gentleman, and in spite of the swift motion and the
cold night air, I must have dozed a great deal from the very first, and then slept like a
log up hill and down dale through stage after stage, for when I was awakened at last it
was by a punch in the ribs, and I opened my eyes to find that we were standing still
before a large building in a city street and that the day had already broken a long time.
“Where are we?” I asked.
“Bristol,” said Tom. “Get down.”
Mr. Trelawney had taken up his residence at an inn far down the docks to superintend
the work upon the schooner. Thither we had now to walk, and our way, to my great
delight, lay along the quays and beside the great multitude of ships of all sizes and rigs
and nations. In one, sailors were singing at their work, in another there were men aloft,
high over my head, hanging to threads that seemed no thicker than a spider’s. Though
I had lived by the shore all my life, I seemed never to have been near the sea till then.
The smell of tar and salt was something new. I saw the most wonderful figureheads,
that had all been far over the ocean. I saw, besides, many old sailors, with rings in their
ears, and whiskers curled in ringlets, and tarry pigtails, and their swaggering, clumsy
sea-walk; and if I had seen as many kings or archbishops I could not have been more
delighted.
And I was going to sea myself, to sea in a schooner, with a piping boatswain and pig-
tailed singing seamen, to sea, bound for an unknown island, and to seek for buried
treasure!
While I was still in this delightful dream, we came suddenly in front of a large inn and
met Squire Trelawney, all dressed out like a sea-officer, in stout blue cloth, coming out
of the door with a smile on his face and a capital imitation of a sailor’s walk.
“Here you are,” he cried, “and the doctor came last night from London. Bravo! The
ship’s company complete!”
“Oh, sir,” cried I, “when do we sail?”
“Sail!” says he. “We sail tomorrow!”

Treasure Island P a g e | 49
 At the Sign of the Spy-glass
WHEN I had done breakfasting the squire gave me a note addressed to John Silver, at
the sign of the Spy-glass, and told me I should easily find the place by following the line
of the docks and keeping a bright lookout for a little tavern with a large brass telescope
for sign. I set off, overjoyed at this opportunity to see some more of the ships and
seamen, and picked my way among a great crowd of people and carts and bales, for the
dock was now at its busiest, until I found the tavern in question.
It was a bright enough little place of entertainment. The sign was newly painted; the
windows had neat red curtains; the floor was cleanly sanded. There was a street on
each side and an open door on both, which made the large, low room pretty clear to
see in, in spite of clouds of tobacco smoke.
The customers were mostly seafaring men, and they talked so loudly that I hung at
the door, almost afraid to enter.
As I was waiting, a man came out of a side room, and at a glance I was sure he must
be Long John. His left leg was cut off close by the hip, and under the left shoulder he
carried a crutch, which he managed with wonderful dexterity, hopping about upon it
like a bird. He was very tall and strong, with a face as big as a ham—plain and pale, but
intelligent and smiling. Indeed, he seemed in the most cheerful spirits, whistling as he

Treasure Island P a g e | 50
moved about among the tables, with a merry word or a slap on the shoulder for the
more favoured of his guests.
Now, to tell you the truth, from the very first mention of Long John in Squire
Trelawney’s letter I had taken a fear in my mind that he might prove to be the very one-
legged sailor whom I had watched for so long at the old Benbow. But one look at the
man before me was enough. I had seen the captain, and Black Dog, and the blind man,
Pew, and I thought I knew what a buccaneer was like—a very different creature,
according to me, from this clean and pleasant-tempered landlord.
I plucked up courage at once, crossed the threshold, and walked right up to the man
where he stood, propped on his crutch, talking to a customer.
“Mr. Silver, sir?” I asked, holding out the note.
“Yes, my lad,” said he; “such is my name, to be sure. And who may you be?” And then
as he saw the squire’s letter, he seemed to me to give something almost like a start.
“Oh!” said he, quite loud, and offering his hand. “I see. You are our new cabin-boy;
pleased I am to see you.”
And he took my hand in his large firm grasp.
Just then one of the customers at the far side rose suddenly and made for the door.
It was close by him, and he was out in the street in a moment. But his hurry had
attracted my notice, and I recognized him at glance. It was the tallow-faced man,
wanting two fingers, who had come first to the Admiral Benbow.

Treasure Island P a g e | 51
 “Oh,” I cried, “stop him! It’s Black Dog!”
“I don’t care two coppers who he is,” cried Silver. “But he hasn’t paid his score. Harry,
run and catch him.”
One of the others who was nearest the door leaped up and started in pursuit.
“If he were Admiral Hawke he shall pay his score,” cried Silver; and then, relinquishing
my hand, “Who did you say he was?” he asked. “Black what?”
“Dog, sir,” said I. “Has Mr. Trelawney not told you of the buccaneers? He was one of
them.”
“So?” cried Silver. “In my house! Ben, run and help Harry. One of those swabs, was
he? Was that you drinking with him, Morgan? Step up here.”
The man whom he called Morgan—an old, grey-haired, mahogany-faced sailor—
came forward pretty sheepishly, rolling his quid.
“Now, Morgan,” said Long John very sternly, “you never clapped your eyes on that
Black—Black Dog before, did you, now?”
“Not I, sir,” said Morgan with a salute.
“You didn’t know his name, did you?”

Treasure Island P a g e | 52
 “No, sir.”
“By the powers, Tom Morgan, it’s as good for you!” exclaimed the landlord. “If you
had been mixed up with the like of that, you would never have put another foot in my
house, you may lay to that. And what was he saying to you?”
“I don’t rightly know, sir,” answered Morgan.
“Do you call that a head on your shoulders, or a blessed dead-eye?” cried Long John.
“Don’t rightly know, don’t you! Perhaps you don’t happen to rightly know who you was
speaking to, perhaps? Come, now, what was he jawing—v’yages, cap’ns, ships? Pipe
up! What was it?”
“We was a-talkin’ of keel-hauling,” answered Morgan.
“Keel-hauling, was you? And a mighty suitable thing, too, and you may lay to that.
Get back to your place for a lubber, Tom.”
And then, as Morgan rolled back to his seat, Silver added to me in a confidential
whisper that was very flattering, as I thought, “He’s quite an honest man, Tom Morgan,
on’y stupid. And now,” he ran on again, aloud, “let’s see—Black Dog? No, I don’t know
the name, not I. Yet I kind of think I’ve—yes, I’ve seen the swab. He used to come here
with a blind beggar, he used.”
“That he did, you may be sure,” said I. “I knew that blind man too. His name was
Pew.”
“It was!” cried Silver, now quite excited. “Pew! That were his name for certain. Ah,
he looked a shark, he did! If we run down this Black Dog, now, there’ll be news for Cap’n
Trelawney! Ben’s a good runner; few seamen run better than Ben. He should run him
down, hand over hand, by the powers! He talked o’ keel-hauling, did he? I’ll keel-haul
him!”
All the time he was jerking out these phrases he was stumping up and down the
tavern on his crutch, slapping tables with his hand, and giving such a show of excitement
as would have convinced an Old Bailey judge or a Bow Street runner. My suspicions had
been thoroughly reawakened on finding Black Dog at the Spy-glass, and I watched the
cook narrowly. But he was too deep, and too ready, and too clever for me, and by the
time the two men had come back out of breath and confessed that they had lost the
track in a crowd, and been scolded like thieves, I would have gone bail for the innocence
of Long John Silver.
“See here, now, Hawkins,” said he, “here’s a blessed hard thing on a man like me,
now, ain’t it? There’s Cap’n Trelawney—what’s he to think? Here I have this
confounded son of a Dutchman sitting in my own house drinking of my own rum! Here
you comes and tells me of it plain; and here I let him give us all the slip before my

Treasure Island P a g e | 53
blessed deadlights! Now, Hawkins, you do me justice with the cap’n. You’re a lad, you
are, but you’re as smart as paint. I see that when you first come in. Now, here it is: What
could I do, with this old timber I hobble on? When I was an A B master mariner I’d have
come up alongside of him, hand over hand, and broached him to in a brace of old
shakes, I would; but now—”
And then, all of a sudden, he stopped, and his jaw dropped as though he had
remembered something.
“The score!” he burst out. “Three goes o’ rum! Why, shiver my timbers, if I hadn’t
forgotten my score!”
And falling on a bench, he laughed until the tears ran down his cheeks. I could not
help joining, and we laughed together, peal after peal, until the tavern rang again.
“Why, what a precious old sea-calf I am!” he said at last, wiping his cheeks. “You and
me should get on well, Hawkins, for I’ll take my davy I should be rated ship’s boy. But
come now, stand by to go about. This won’t do. Dooty is dooty, messmates. I’ll put on
my old cockerel hat, and step along of you to Cap’n Trelawney, and report this here
affair. For mind you, it’s serious, young Hawkins; and neither you nor me’s come out of
it with what I should make so bold as to call credit. Nor you neither, says you; not
smart—none of the pair of us smart. But dash my buttons! That was a good un about
my score.”
And he began to laugh again, and that so heartily, that though I did not see the joke
as he did, I was again obliged to join him in his mirth.
On our little walk along the quays, he made himself the most interesting companion,
telling me about the different ships that we passed by, their rig, tonnage, and
nationality, explaining the work that was going forward—how one was discharging,
another taking in cargo, and a third making ready for sea—and every now and then
telling me some little anecdote of ships or seamen or repeating a nautical phrase till I
had learned it perfectly. I began to see that here was one of the best of possible
shipmates.
When we got to the inn, the squire and Dr. Livesey were seated together, finishing a
quart of ale with a toast in it, before they should go aboard the schooner on a visit of
inspection.
Long John told the story from first to last, with a great deal of spirit and the most
perfect truth. “That was how it were, now, weren’t it, Hawkins?” he would say, now
and again, and I could always bear him entirely out.

Treasure Island P a g e | 54
 The two gentlemen regretted that Black Dog had got away, but we all agreed there
was nothing to be done, and after he had been complimented, Long John took up his
crutch and departed.
“All hands aboard by four this afternoon,” shouted the squire after him.
“Aye, aye, sir,” cried the cook, in the passage.
“Well, squire,” said Dr. Livesey, “I don’t put much faith in your discoveries, as a
general thing; but I will say this, John Silver suits me.”
“The man’s a perfect trump,” declared the squire.
“And now,” added the doctor, “Jim may come on board with us, may he not?”
“To be sure he may,” says squire. “Take your hat, Hawkins, and we’ll see the ship.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 55
 Powder and Arms
THE Hispaniola lay some way out, and we went under the figureheads and round the
sterns of many other ships, and their cables sometimes grated underneath our keel,
and sometimes swung above us. At last, however, we got alongside, and were met and
saluted as we stepped aboard by the mate, Mr. Arrow, a brown old sailor with earrings
in his ears and a squint. He and the squire were very thick and friendly, but I soon
observed that things were not the same between Mr. Trelawney and the captain.
This last was a sharp-looking man who seemed angry with everything on board and
was soon to tell us why, for we had hardly got down into the cabin when a sailor
followed us.
“Captain Smollett, sir, axing to speak with you,” said he.
“I am always at the captain’s orders. Show him in,” said the squire.
The captain, who was close behind his messenger, entered at once and shut the door
behind him.
“Well, Captain Smollett, what have you to say? All well, I hope; all shipshape and
seaworthy?”

Treasure Island P a g e | 56
 “Well, sir,” said the captain, “better speak plain, I believe, even at the risk of offence.
I don’t like this cruise; I don’t like the men; and I don’t like my officer. That’s short and
sweet.”
“Perhaps, sir, you don’t like the ship?” inquired the squire, very angry, as I could see.
“I can’t speak as to that, sir, not having seen her tried,” said the captain. “She seems
a clever craft; more I can’t say.”
“Possibly, sir, you may not like your employer, either?” says the squire.
But here Dr. Livesey cut in.
“Stay a bit,” said he, “stay a bit. No use of such questions as that but to produce ill
feeling. The captain has said too much or he has said too little, and I’m bound to say
that I require an explanation of his words. You don’t, you say, like this cruise. Now,
why?”
“I was engaged, sir, on what we call sealed orders, to sail this ship for that gentleman
where he should bid me,” said the captain. “So far so good. But now I find that every
man before the mast knows more than I do. I don’t call that fair, now, do you?”
“No,” said Dr. Livesey, “I don’t.”
“Next,” said the captain, “I learn we are going after treasure—hear it from my own
hands, mind you. Now, treasure is ticklish work; I don’t like treasure voyages on any
account, and I don’t like them, above all, when they are secret and when (begging your
pardon, Mr. Trelawney) the secret has been told to the parrot.”
“Silver’s parrot?” asked the squire.
“It’s a way of speaking,” said the captain. “Blabbed, I mean. It’s my belief neither of
you gentlemen know what you are about, but I’ll tell you my way of it—life or death,
and a close run.”
“That is all clear, and, I dare say, true enough,” replied Dr. Livesey. “We take the risk,
but we are not so ignorant as you believe us. Next, you say you don’t like the crew. Are
they not good seamen?”
“I don’t like them, sir,” returned Captain Smollett. “And I think I should have had the
choosing of my own hands, if you go to that.”
“Perhaps you should,” replied the doctor. “My friend should, perhaps, have taken you
along with him; but the slight, if there be one, was unintentional. And you don’t like Mr.
Arrow?”
“I don’t, sir. I believe he’s a good seaman, but he’s too free with the crew to be a good
officer. A mate should keep himself to himself—shouldn’t drink with the men before
the mast!”

Treasure Island P a g e | 57
 “Do you mean he drinks?” cried the squire.
“No, sir,” replied the captain, “only that he’s too familiar.”
“Well, now, and the short and long of it, captain?” asked the doctor. “Tell us what
you want.”
“Well, gentlemen, are you determined to go on this cruise?”
“Like iron,” answered the squire.
“Very good,” said the captain. “Then, as you’ve heard me very patiently, saying things
that I could not prove, hear me a few words more. They are putting the powder and the
arms in the fore hold. Now, you have a good place under the cabin; why not put them
there?—first point. Then, you are bringing four of your own people with you, and they
tell me some of them are to be berthed forward. Why not give them the berths here
beside the cabin?—second point.”
“Any more?” asked Mr. Trelawney.
“One more,” said the captain. “There’s been too much blabbing already.”
“Far too much,” agreed the doctor.
“I’ll tell you what I’ve heard myself,” continued Captain Smollett: “that you have a
map of an island, that there’s crosses on the map to show where treasure is, and that
the island lies—” And then he named the latitude and longitude exactly.
“I never told that,” cried the squire, “to a soul!”
“The hands know it, sir,” returned the captain.
“Livesey, that must have been you or Hawkins,” cried the squire.
“It doesn’t much matter who it was,” replied the doctor. And I could see that neither
he nor the captain paid much regard to Mr. Trelawney’s protestations. Neither did I, to
be sure, he was so loose a talker; yet in this case I believe he was really right and that
nobody had told the situation of the island.
“Well, gentlemen,” continued the captain, “I don’t know who has this map; but I make
it a point, it shall be kept secret even from me and Mr. Arrow. Otherwise I would ask
you to let me resign.”
“I see,” said the doctor. “You wish us to keep this matter dark and to make a garrison
of the stern part of the ship, manned with my friend’s own people, and provided with
all the arms and powder on board. In other words, you fear a mutiny.”
“Sir,” said Captain Smollett, “with no intention to take offence, I deny your right to
put words into my mouth. No captain, sir, would be justified in going to sea at all if he
had ground enough to say that. As for Mr. Arrow, I believe him thoroughly honest; some
of the men are the same; all may be for what I know. But I am responsible for the ship’s

Treasure Island P a g e | 58
safety and the life of every man Jack aboard of her. I see things going, as I think, not
quite right. And I ask you to take certain precautions or let me resign my berth. And
that’s all.”
“Captain Smollett,” began the doctor with a smile, “did ever you hear the fable of the
mountain and the mouse? You’ll excuse me, I dare say, but you remind me of that fable.
When you came in here, I’ll stake my wig, you meant more than this.”
“Doctor,” said the captain, “you are smart. When I came in here I meant to get
discharged. I had no thought that Mr. Trelawney would hear a word.”
“No more I would,” cried the squire. “Had Livesey not been here I should have seen
you to the deuce. As it is, I have heard you. I will do as you desire, but I think the worse
of you.”
“That’s as you please, sir,” said the captain. “You’ll find I do my duty.”
And with that he took his leave.
“Trelawney,” said the doctor, “contrary to all my notions, I believed you have
managed to get two honest men on board with you—that man and John Silver.”
“Silver, if you like,” cried the squire; “but as for that intolerable humbug, I declare I
think his conduct unmanly, unsailorly, and downright un-English.”
“Well,” says the doctor, “we shall see.”
When we came on deck, the men had begun already to take out the arms and
powder, yo-ho-ing at their work, while the captain and Mr. Arrow stood by
superintending.
The new arrangement was quite to my liking. The whole schooner had been
overhauled; six berths had been made astern out of what had been the after-part of
the main hold; and this set of cabins was only joined to the galley and forecastle by a
sparred passage on the port side. It had been originally meant that the captain, Mr.
Arrow, Hunter, Joyce, the doctor, and the squire were to occupy these six berths. Now
Redruth and I were to get two of them and Mr. Arrow and the captain were to sleep on
deck in the companion, which had been enlarged on each side till you might almost
have called it a round-house. Very low it was still, of course; but there was room to
swing two hammocks, and even the mate seemed pleased with the arrangement. Even
he, perhaps, had been doubtful as to the crew, but that is only guess, for as you shall
hear, we had not long the benefit of his opinion.
We were all hard at work, changing the powder and the berths, when the last man or
two, and Long John along with them, came off in a shore-boat.
The cook came up the side like a monkey for cleverness, and as soon as he saw what
was doing, “So ho, mates!” says he. “What’s this?”

Treasure Island P a g e | 59
 “We’re a-changing of the powder, Jack,” answers one.
“Why, by the powers,” cried Long John, “if we do, we’ll miss the morning tide!”
“My orders!” said the captain shortly. “You may go below, my man. Hands will want
supper.”
“Aye, aye, sir,” answered the cook, and touching his forelock, he disappeared at once
in the direction of his galley.
“That’s a good man, captain,” said the doctor.
“Very likely, sir,” replied Captain Smollett. “Easy with that, men—easy,” he ran on, to
the fellows who were shifting the powder; and then suddenly observing me examining
the swivel we carried amidships, a long brass nine, “Here you, ship’s boy,” he cried, “out
o’ that! Off with you to the cook and get some work.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 60
Treasure Island P a g e | 61
 And then as I was hurrying off I heard him say, quite loudly, to the doctor, “I’ll have
no favourites on my ship.”
I assure you I was quite of the squire’s way of thinking, and hated the captain deeply.

Treasure Island P a g e | 62
 The Voyage
ALL that night we were in a great bustle getting things stowed in their place, and
boatfuls of the squire’s friends, Mr. Blandly and the like, coming off to wish him a good
voyage and a safe return. We never had a night at the Admiral Benbow when I had half
the work; and I was dog-tired when, a little before dawn, the boatswain sounded his
pipe and the crew began to man the capstan-bars. I might have been twice as weary,
yet I would not have left the deck, all was so new and interesting to me—the brief
commands, the shrill note of the whistle, the men bustling to their places in the glimmer
of the ship’s lanterns.
“Now, Barbecue, tip us a stave,” cried one voice.
“The old one,” cried another.
“Aye, aye, mates,” said Long John, who was standing by, with his crutch under his
arm, and at once broke out in the air and words I knew so well:
“Fifteen men on the dead man’s chest—”
And then the whole crew bore chorus:—
“Yo-ho-ho, and a bottle of rum!”
And at the third “Ho!” drove the bars before them with a will.

Treasure Island P a g e | 63
 Even at that exciting moment it carried me back to the old Admiral Benbow in a
second, and I seemed to hear the voice of the captain piping in the chorus. But soon the
anchor was short up; soon it was hanging dripping at the bows; soon the sails began to
draw, and the land and shipping to flit by on either side; and before I could lie down to
snatch an hour of slumber the Hispaniola had begun her voyage to the Isle of Treasure.
I am not going to relate that voyage in detail. It was fairly prosperous. The ship proved
to be a good ship, the crew were capable seamen, and the captain thoroughly
understood his business. But before we came the length of Treasure Island, two or three
things had happened which require to be known.
Mr. Arrow, first of all, turned out even worse than the captain had feared. He had no
command among the men, and people did what they pleased with him. But that was by
no means the worst of it, for after a day or two at sea he began to appear on deck with
hazy eye, red cheeks, stuttering tongue, and other marks of drunkenness. Time after
time he was ordered below in disgrace. Sometimes he fell and cut himself; sometimes
he lay all day long in his little bunk at one side of the companion; sometimes for a day
or two he would be almost sober and attend to his work at least passably.
In the meantime, we could never make out where he got the drink. That was the
ship’s mystery. Watch him as we pleased, we could do nothing to solve it; and when we
asked him to his face, he would only laugh if he were drunk, and if he were sober deny
solemnly that he ever tasted anything but water.
He was not only useless as an officer and a bad influence amongst the men, but it was
plain that at this rate he must soon kill himself outright, so nobody was much surprised,
nor very sorry, when one dark night, with a head sea, he disappeared entirely and was
seen no more.
“Overboard!” said the captain. “Well, gentlemen, that saves the trouble of putting
him in irons.”
But there we were, without a mate; and it was necessary, of course, to advance one
of the men. The boatswain, Job Anderson, was the likeliest man aboard, and though he
kept his old title, he served in a way as mate. Mr. Trelawney had followed the sea, and
his knowledge made him very useful, for he often took a watch himself in easy weather.
And the coxswain, Israel Hands, was a careful, wily, old, experienced seaman who could
be trusted at a pinch with almost anything.
He was a great confidant of Long John Silver, and so the mention of his name leads
me on to speak of our ship’s cook, Barbecue, as the men called him.
Aboard ship he carried his crutch by a lanyard round his neck, to have both hands as
free as possible. It was something to see him wedge the foot of the crutch against a

Treasure Island P a g e | 64
bulkhead, and propped against it, yielding to every movement of the ship, get on with
his cooking like someone safe ashore. Still more strange was it to see him in the heaviest
of weather cross the deck. He had a line or two rigged up to help him across the widest
spaces—Long John’s earrings, they were called; and he would hand himself from one
place to another, now using the crutch, now trailing it alongside by the lanyard, as
quickly as another man could walk. Yet some of the men who had sailed with him before
expressed their pity to see him so reduced.
“He’s no common man, Barbecue,” said the coxswain to me. “He had good schooling
in his young days and can speak like a book when so minded; and brave—a lion’s
nothing alongside of Long John! I seen him grapple four and knock their heads
together—him unarmed.”
All the crew respected and even obeyed him. He had a way of talking to each and
doing everybody some particular service. To me he was unweariedly kind, and always
glad to see me in the galley, which he kept as clean as a new pin, the dishes hanging up
burnished and his parrot in a cage in one corner.
“Come away, Hawkins,” he would say; “come and have a yarn with John. Nobody
more welcome than yourself, my son. Sit you down and hear the news. Here’s Cap’n
Flint—I calls my parrot Cap’n Flint, after the famous buccaneer—here’s Cap’n Flint
predicting success to our v’yage. Wasn’t you, cap’n?”
And the parrot would say, with great rapidity, “Pieces of eight! Pieces of eight! Pieces
of eight!” till you wondered that it was not out of breath, or till John threw his
handkerchief over the cage.
“Now, that bird,” he would say, “is, maybe, two hundred years old, Hawkins—they
live forever mostly; and if anybody’s seen more wickedness, it must be the devil himself.
She’s sailed with England, the great Cap’n England, the pirate. She’s been at
Madagascar, and at Malabar, and Surinam, and Providence, and Portobello. She was at
the fishing up of the wrecked plate ships. It’s there she learned ‘Pieces of eight,’ and
little wonder; three hundred and fifty thousand of ’em, Hawkins! She was at the
boarding of the viceroy of the Indies out of Goa, she was; and to look at her you would
think she was a babby. But you smelt powder—didn’t you, cap’n?”
“Stand by to go about,” the parrot would scream.
“Ah, she’s a handsome craft, she is,” the cook would say, and give her sugar from his
pocket, and then the bird would peck at the bars and swear straight on, passing belief
for wickedness. “There,” John would add, “you can’t touch pitch and not be mucked,
lad. Here’s this poor old innocent bird o’ mine swearing blue fire, and none the wiser,
you may lay to that. She would swear the same, in a manner of speaking, before

Treasure Island P a g e | 65
chaplain.” And John would touch his forelock with a solemn way he had that made me
think he was the best of men.
In the meantime, the squire and Captain Smollett were still on pretty distant terms
with one another. The squire made no bones about the matter; he despised the captain.
The captain, on his part, never spoke but when he was spoken to, and then sharp and
short and dry, and not a word wasted. He owned, when driven into a corner, that he
seemed to have been wrong about the crew, that some of them were as brisk as he
wanted to see and all had behaved fairly well. As for the ship, he had taken a downright
fancy to her. “She’ll lie a point nearer the wind than a man has a right to expect of his
own married wife, sir. But,” he would add, “all I say is, we’re not home again, and I don’t
like the cruise.”
The squire, at this, would turn away and march up and down the deck, chin in air.
“A trifle more of that man,” he would say, “and I shall explode.”
We had some heavy weather, which only proved the qualities of the Hispaniola. Every
man on board seemed well content, and they must have been hard to please if they
had been otherwise, for it is my belief there was never a ship’s company so spoiled since
Noah put to sea. Double grog was going on the least excuse; there was duff on odd
days, as, for instance, if the squire heard it was any man’s birthday, and always a barrel
of apples standing broached in the waist for anyone to help himself that had a fancy.
“Never knew good come of it yet,” the captain said to Dr. Livesey. “Spoil forecastle
hands, make devils. That’s my belief.”
But good did come of the apple barrel, as you shall hear, for if it had not been for
that, we should have had no note of warning and might all have perished by the hand
of treachery.
This was how it came about.
We had run up the trades to get the wind of the island we were after—I am not
allowed to be more plain—and now we were running down for it with a bright lookout
day and night. It was about the last day of our outward voyage by the largest
computation; some time that night, or at latest before noon of the morrow, we should
sight the Treasure Island. We were heading S.S.W. and had a steady breeze abeam and
a quiet sea. The Hispaniola rolled steadily, dipping her bowsprit now and then with a
whiff of spray. All was drawing alow and aloft; everyone was in the bravest spirits
because we were now so near an end of the first part of our adventure.
Now, just after sundown, when all my work was over and I was on my way to my
berth, it occurred to me that I should like an apple. I ran on deck. The watch was all
forward looking out for the island. The man at the helm was watching the luff of the sail

Treasure Island P a g e | 66
and whistling away gently to himself, and that was the only sound excepting the swish
of the sea against the bows and around the sides of the ship.

Treasure Island P a g e | 67
Treasure Island P a g e | 68
 In I got bodily into the apple barrel, and found there was scarce an apple left; but
sitting down there in the dark, what with the sound of the waters and the rocking
movement of the ship, I had either fallen asleep or was on the point of doing so when
a heavy man sat down with rather a clash close by. The barrel shook as he leaned his
shoulders against it, and I was just about to jump up when the man began to speak. It
was Silver’s voice, and before I had heard a dozen words, I would not have shown myself
for all the world, but lay there, trembling and listening, in the extreme of fear and
curiosity, for from these dozen words I understood that the lives of all the honest men
aboard depended upon me alone.

Treasure Island P a g e | 69
 What I Heard in the Apple Barrel
NO, not I,” said Silver. “Flint was cap’n; I was quartermaster, along of my timber leg.
The same broadside I lost my leg, old Pew lost his deadlights. It was a master surgeon,
him that ampytated me—out of college and all—Latin by the bucket, and what not; but
he was hanged like a dog, and sun-dried like the rest, at Corso Castle. That was Roberts’
men, that was, and comed of changing names to their ships—Royal Fortune and so on.
Now, what a ship was christened, so let her stay, I says. So it was with the Cassandra,
as brought us all safe home from Malabar, after England took the viceroy of the Indies;
so it was with the old Walrus, Flint’s old ship, as I’ve seen amuck with the red blood and
fit to sink with gold.”
“Ah!” cried another voice, that of the youngest hand on board, and evidently full of
admiration. “He was the flower of the flock, was Flint!”
“Davis was a man too, by all accounts,” said Silver. “I never sailed along of him; first
with England, then with Flint, that’s my story; and now here on my own account, in a
manner of speaking. I laid by nine hundred safe, from England, and two thousand after
Flint. That ain’t bad for a man before the mast—all safe in bank. ’Tain’t earning now,
it’s saving does it, you may lay to that. Where’s all England’s men now? I dunno.
Where’s Flint’s? Why, most on ’em aboard here, and glad to get the duff—been begging

Treasure Island P a g e | 70
before that, some on ’em. Old Pew, as had lost his sight, and might have thought shame,
spends twelve hundred pound in a year, like a lord in Parliament. Where is he now?
Well, he’s dead now and under hatches; but for two year before that, shiver my timbers,
the man was starving! He begged, and he stole, and he cut throats, and starved at that,
by the powers!”
“Well, it ain’t much use, after all,” said the young seaman.
“’Tain’t much use for fools, you may lay to it—that, nor nothing,” cried Silver. “But
now, you look here: you’re young, you are, but you’re as smart as paint. I see that when
I set my eyes on you, and I’ll talk to you like a man.”
You may imagine how I felt when I heard this abominable old rogue addressing
another in the very same words of flattery as he had used to myself. I think, if I had
been able, that I would have killed him through the barrel. Meantime, he ran on, little
supposing he was overheard.
“Here it is about gentlemen of fortune. They lives rough, and they risk swinging, but
they eat and drink like fighting-cocks, and when a cruise is done, why, it’s hundreds of
pounds instead of hundreds of farthings in their pockets. Now, the most goes for rum
and a good fling, and to sea again in their shirts. But that’s not the course I lay. I puts it
all away, some here, some there, and none too much anywheres, by reason of
suspicion. I’m fifty, mark you; once back from this cruise, I set up gentleman in earnest.
Time enough too, says you. Ah, but I’ve lived easy in the meantime, never denied myself
o’ nothing heart desires, and slep’ soft and ate dainty all my days but when at sea. And
how did I begin? Before the mast, like you!”
“Well,” said the other, “but all the other money’s gone now, ain’t it? You daren’t show
face in Bristol after this.”
“Why, where might you suppose it was?” asked Silver derisively.
“At Bristol, in banks and places,” answered his companion.
“It were,” said the cook; “it were when we weighed anchor. But my old missis has it
all by now. And the Spy-glass is sold, lease and goodwill and rigging; and the old girl’s
off to meet me. I would tell you where, for I trust you, but it’d make jealousy among
the mates.”
“And can you trust your missis?” asked the other.
“Gentlemen of fortune,” returned the cook, “usually trusts little among themselves,
and right they are, you may lay to it. But I have a way with me, I have. When a mate
brings a slip on his cable—one as knows me, I mean—it won’t be in the same world with
old John. There was some that was feared of Pew, and some that was feared of Flint;
but Flint his own self was feared of me. Feared he was, and proud. They was the

Treasure Island P a g e | 71
roughest crew afloat, was Flint’s; the devil himself would have been feared to go to sea
with them. Well now, I tell you, I’m not a boasting man, and you seen yourself how easy
I keep company, but when I was quartermaster, lambs wasn’t the word for Flint’s old
buccaneers. Ah, you may be sure of yourself in old John’s ship.”
“Well, I tell you now,” replied the lad, “I didn’t half a quarter like the job till I had this
talk with you, John; but there’s my hand on it now.”
“And a brave lad you were, and smart too,” answered Silver, shaking hands so heartily
that all the barrel shook, “and a finer figurehead for a gentleman of fortune I never
clapped my eyes on.”
By this time I had begun to understand the meaning of their terms. By a “gentleman
of fortune” they plainly meant neither more nor less than a common pirate, and the
little scene that I had overheard was the last act in the corruption of one of the honest
hands—perhaps of the last one left aboard. But on this point I was soon to be relieved,
for Silver giving a little whistle, a third man strolled up and sat down by the party.
“Dick’s square,” said Silver.
“Oh, I know’d Dick was square,” returned the voice of the coxswain, Israel Hands.
“He’s no fool, is Dick.” And he turned his quid and spat. “But look here,” he went on,
“here’s what I want to know, Barbecue: how long are we a-going to stand off and on
like a blessed bumboat? I’ve had a’most enough o’ Cap’n Smollett; he’s hazed me long
enough, by thunder! I want to go into that cabin, I do. I want their pickles and wines,
and that.”
“Israel,” said Silver, “your head ain’t much account, nor ever was. But you’re able to
hear, I reckon; leastways, your ears is big enough. Now, here’s what I say: you’ll berth
forward, and you’ll live hard, and you’ll speak soft, and you’ll keep sober till I give the
word; and you may lay to that, my son.”
“Well, I don’t say no, do I?” growled the coxswain. “What I say is, when? That’s what
I say.”
“When! By the powers!” cried Silver. “Well now, if you want to know, I’ll tell you
when. The last moment I can manage, and that’s when. Here’s a first-rate seaman,
Cap’n Smollett, sails the blessed ship for us. Here’s this squire and doctor with a map
and such—I don’t know where it is, do I? No more do you, says you. Well then, I mean
this squire and doctor shall find the stuff, and help us to get it aboard, by the powers.
Then we’ll see. If I was sure of you all, sons of double Dutchmen, I’d have Cap’n Smollett
navigate us half-way back again before I struck.”
“Why, we’re all seamen aboard here, I should think,” said the lad Dick.

Treasure Island P a g e | 72
 “We’re all forecastle hands, you mean,” snapped Silver. “We can steer a course, but
who’s to set one? That’s what all you gentlemen split on, first and last. If I had my way,
I’d have Cap’n Smollett work us back into the trades at least; then we’d have no blessed
miscalculations and a spoonful of water a day. But I know the sort you are. I’ll finish
with ’em at the island, as soon’s the blunt’s on board, and a pity it is. But you’re never
happy till you’re drunk. Split my sides, I’ve a sick heart to sail with the likes of you!”
“Easy all, Long John,” cried Israel. “Who’s a-crossin’ of you?”
“Why, how many tall ships, think ye, now, have I seen laid aboard? And how many
brisk lads drying in the sun at Execution Dock?” cried Silver. “And all for this same hurry
and hurry and hurry. You hear me? I seen a thing or two at sea, I have. If you would on’y
lay your course, and a p’int to windward, you would ride in carriages, you would. But
not you! I know you. You’ll have your mouthful of rum tomorrow, and go hang.”
“Everybody knowed you was a kind of a chapling, John; but there’s others as could
hand and steer as well as you,” said Israel. “They liked a bit o’ fun, they did. They wasn’t
so high and dry, nohow, but took their fling, like jolly companions every one.”
“So?” says Silver. “Well, and where are they now? Pew was that sort, and he died a
beggar-man. Flint was, and he died of rum at Savannah. Ah, they was a sweet crew,
they was! On’y, where are they?”
“But,” asked Dick, “when we do lay ’em athwart, what are we to do with ’em,
anyhow?”
“There’s the man for me!” cried the cook admiringly. “That’s what I call business.
Well, what would you think? Put ’em ashore like maroons? That would have been
England’s way. Or cut ’em down like that much pork? That would have been Flint’s, or
Billy Bones’s.”
“Billy was the man for that,” said Israel. “‘Dead men don’t bite,’ says he. Well, he’s
dead now hisself; he knows the long and short on it now; and if ever a rough hand come
to port, it was Billy.”
“Right you are,” said Silver; “rough and ready. But mark you here, I’m an easy man—
I’m quite the gentleman, says you; but this time it’s serious. Dooty is dooty, mates. I
give my vote—death. When I’m in Parlyment and riding in my coach, I don’t want none
of these sea-lawyers in the cabin a-coming home, unlooked for, like the devil at prayers.
Wait is what I say; but when the time comes, why, let her rip!”
“John,” cries the coxswain, “you’re a man!”
“You’ll say so, Israel when you see,” said Silver. “Only one thing I claim—I claim
Trelawney. I’ll wring his calf’s head off his body with these hands, Dick!” he added,

Treasure Island P a g e | 73
breaking off. “You just jump up, like a sweet lad, and get me an apple, to wet my pipe
like.”
You may fancy the terror I was in! I should have leaped out and run for it if I had found
the strength, but my limbs and heart alike misgave me. I heard Dick begin to rise, and
then someone seemingly stopped him, and the voice of Hands exclaimed, “Oh, stow
that! Don’t you get sucking of that bilge, John. Let’s have a go of the rum.”
“Dick,” said Silver, “I trust you. I’ve a gauge on the keg, mind. There’s the key; you fill
a pannikin and bring it up.”
Terrified as I was, I could not help thinking to myself that this must have been how
Mr. Arrow got the strong waters that destroyed him.
Dick was gone but a little while, and during his absence Israel spoke straight on in the
cook’s ear. It was but a word or two that I could catch, and yet I gathered some
important news, for besides other scraps that tended to the same purpose, this whole
clause was audible: “Not another man of them’ll jine.” Hence there were still faithful
men on board.
When Dick returned, one after another of the trio took the pannikin and drank—one
“To luck,” another with a “Here’s to old Flint,” and Silver himself saying, in a kind of
song, “Here’s to ourselves, and hold your luff, plenty of prizes and plenty of duff.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 74
Treasure Island P a g e | 75
 Just then a sort of brightness fell upon me in the barrel, and looking up, I found the
moon had risen and was silvering the mizzen-top and shining white on the luff of the
fore-sail; and almost at the same time the voice of the lookout shouted, “Land ho!”

Treasure Island P a g e | 76
 Council of War
THERE was a great rush of feet across the deck. I could hear people tumbling up from
the cabin and the forecastle, and slipping in an instant outside my barrel, I dived behind
the fore-sail, made a double towards the stern, and came out upon the open deck in
time to join Hunter and Dr. Livesey in the rush for the weather bow.
There all hands were already congregated. A belt of fog had lifted almost
simultaneously with the appearance of the moon. Away to the south-west of us we saw
two low hills, about a couple of miles apart, and rising behind one of them a third and
higher hill, whose peak was still buried in the fog. All three seemed sharp and conical in
figure.
So much I saw, almost in a dream, for I had not yet recovered from my horrid fear of
a minute or two before. And then I heard the voice of Captain Smollett issuing orders.
The Hispaniola was laid a couple of points nearer the wind and now sailed a course that
would just clear the island on the east.
“And now, men,” said the captain, when all was sheeted home, “has any one of you
ever seen that land ahead?”
“I have, sir,” said Silver. “I’ve watered there with a trader I was cook in.”
“The anchorage is on the south, behind an islet, I fancy?” asked the captain.

Treasure Island P a g e | 77
 “Yes, sir; Skeleton Island they calls it. It were a main place for pirates once, and a hand
we had on board knowed all their names for it. That hill to the nor’ard they calls the
Fore-mast Hill; there are three hills in a row running south’ard—fore, main, and mizzen,
sir. But the main—that’s the big un, with the cloud on it—they usually calls the Spy-
glass, by reason of a lookout they kept when they was in the anchorage cleaning, for
it’s there they cleaned their ships, sir, asking your pardon.”
“I have a chart here,” says Captain Smollett. “See if that’s the place.”
Long John’s eyes burned in his head as he took the chart, but by the fresh look of the
paper I knew he was doomed to disappointment. This was not the map we found in Billy
Bones’s chest, but an accurate copy, complete in all things—names and heights and
soundings—with the single exception of the red crosses and the written notes. Sharp
as must have been his annoyance, Silver had the strength of mind to hide it.
“Yes, sir,” said he, “this is the spot, to be sure, and very prettily drawed out. Who
might have done that, I wonder? The pirates were too ignorant, I reckon. Aye, here it
is: ‘Capt. Kidd’s Anchorage’—just the name my shipmate called it. There’s a strong
current runs along the south, and then away nor’ard up the west coast. Right you was,
sir,” says he, “to haul your wind and keep the weather of the island. Leastways, if such
was your intention as to enter and careen, and there ain’t no better place for that in
these waters.”
“Thank you, my man,” says Captain Smollett. “I’ll ask you later on to give us a help.
You may go.”
I was surprised at the coolness with which John avowed his knowledge of the island,
and I own I was half-frightened when I saw him drawing nearer to myself. He did not
know, to be sure, that I had overheard his council from the apple barrel, and yet I had
by this time taken such a horror of his cruelty, duplicity, and power that I could scarce
conceal a shudder when he laid his hand upon my arm.
“Ah,” says he, “this here is a sweet spot, this island—a sweet spot for a lad to get
ashore on. You’ll bathe, and you’ll climb trees, and you’ll hunt goats, you will; and you’ll
get aloft on them hills like a goat yourself. Why, it makes me young again. I was going
to forget my timber leg, I was. It’s a pleasant thing to be young and have ten toes, and
you may lay to that. When you want to go a bit of exploring, you just ask old John, and
he’ll put up a snack for you to take along.”
And clapping me in the friendliest way upon the shoulder, he hobbled off forward
and went below.
Captain Smollett, the squire, and Dr. Livesey were talking together on the quarter-
deck, and anxious as I was to tell them my story, I durst not interrupt them openly.

Treasure Island P a g e | 78
While I was still casting about in my thoughts to find some probable excuse, Dr. Livesey
called me to his side. He had left his pipe below, and being a slave to tobacco, had meant
that I should fetch it; but as soon as I was near enough to speak and not to be overheard,
I broke immediately, “Doctor, let me speak. Get the captain and squire down to the
cabin, and then make some pretence to send for me. I have terrible news.”
The doctor changed countenance a little, but next moment he was master of himself.
“Thank you, Jim,” said he quite loudly, “that was all I wanted to know,” as if he had
asked me a question.
And with that he turned on his heel and rejoined the other two. They spoke together
for a little, and though none of them started, or raised his voice, or so much as whistled,
it was plain enough that Dr. Livesey had communicated my request, for the next thing
that I heard was the captain giving an order to Job Anderson, and all hands were piped
on deck.
“My lads,” said Captain Smollett, “I’ve a word to say to you. This land that we have
sighted is the place we have been sailing for. Mr. Trelawney, being a very open-handed
gentleman, as we all know, has just asked me a word or two, and as I was able to tell
him that every man on board had done his duty, alow and aloft, as I never ask to see it
done better, why, he and I and the doctor are going below to the cabin to
drink your health and luck, and you’ll have grog served out for you to drink our health
and luck. I’ll tell you what I think of this: I think it handsome. And if you think as I do,
you’ll give a good sea-cheer for the gentleman that does it.”
The cheer followed—that was a matter of course; but it rang out so full and hearty
that I confess I could hardly believe these same men were plotting for our blood.
“One more cheer for Cap’n Smollett,” cried Long John when the first had subsided.

Treasure Island P a g e | 79
 And this also was given with a will.
On the top of that the three gentlemen went below, and not long after, word was
sent forward that Jim Hawkins was wanted in the cabin.
I found them all three seated round the table, a bottle of Spanish wine and some
raisins before them, and the doctor smoking away, with his wig on his lap, and that, I
knew, was a sign that he was agitated. The stern window was open, for it was a warm
night, and you could see the moon shining behind on the ship’s wake.
“Now, Hawkins,” said the squire, “you have something to say. Speak up.”
I did as I was bid, and as short as I could make it, told the whole details of Silver’s
conversation. Nobody interrupted me till I was done, nor did any one of the three of
them make so much as a movement, but they kept their eyes upon my face from first
to last.
“Jim,” said Dr. Livesey, “take a seat.”
And they made me sit down at table beside them, poured me out a glass of wine,
filled my hands with raisins, and all three, one after the other, and each with a bow,
drank my good health, and their service to me, for my luck and courage.

Treasure Island P a g e | 80
 “Now, captain,” said the squire, “you were right, and I was wrong. I own myself an
ass, and I await your orders.”
“No more an ass than I, sir,” returned the captain. “I never heard of a crew that meant
to mutiny but what showed signs before, for any man that had an eye in his head to see
the mischief and take steps according. But this crew,” he added, “beats me.”
“Captain,” said the doctor, “with your permission, that’s Silver. A very remarkable
man.”
“He’d look remarkably well from a yard-arm, sir,” returned the captain. “But this is
talk; this don’t lead to anything. I see three or four points, and with Mr. Trelawney’s
permission, I’ll name them.”
“You, sir, are the captain. It is for you to speak,” says Mr. Trelawney grandly.
“First point,” began Mr. Smollett. “We must go on, because we can’t turn back. If I
gave the word to go about, they would rise at once. Second point, we have time before
us—at least until this treasure’s found. Third point, there are faithful hands. Now, sir,
it’s got to come to blows sooner or later, and what I propose is to take time by the
forelock, as the saying is, and come to blows some fine day when they least expect it.
We can count, I take it, on your own home servants, Mr. Trelawney?”
“As upon myself,” declared the squire.
“Three,” reckoned the captain; “ourselves make seven, counting Hawkins here. Now,
about the honest hands?”
“Most likely Trelawney’s own men,” said the doctor; “those he had picked up for
himself before he lit on Silver.”
“Nay,” replied the squire. “Hands was one of mine.”
“I did think I could have trusted Hands,” added the captain.
“And to think that they’re all Englishmen!” broke out the squire. “Sir, I could find it in
my heart to blow the ship up.”
“Well, gentlemen,” said the captain, “the best that I can say is not much. We must lay
to, if you please, and keep a bright lookout. It’s trying on a man, I know. It would be
pleasanter to come to blows. But there’s no help for it till we know our men. Lay to, and
whistle for a wind, that’s my view.”
“Jim here,” said the doctor, “can help us more than anyone. The men are not shy with
him, and Jim is a noticing lad.”
“Hawkins, I put prodigious faith in you,” added the squire.
I began to feel pretty desperate at this, for I felt altogether helpless; and yet, by an
odd train of circumstances, it was indeed through me that safety came. In the

Treasure Island P a g e | 81
meantime, talk as we pleased, there were only seven out of the twenty-six on whom
we knew we could rely; and out of these seven one was a boy, so that the grown men
on our side were six to their nineteen.

Treasure Island P a g e | 82
 PART THREE — MY SHORE
ADVENTURE

How My Shore Adventure Began

THE appearance of the island when I came on deck next morning was altogether
changed. Although the breeze had now utterly ceased, we had made a great deal of
way during the night and were now lying becalmed about half a mile to the south-east
of the low eastern coast. Grey-coloured woods covered a large part of the surface. This
even tint was indeed broken up by streaks of yellow sand-break in the lower lands, and
by many tall trees of the pine family, out-topping the others—some singly, some in
clumps; but the general colouring was uniform and sad. The hills ran up clear above the
vegetation in spires of naked rock. All were strangely shaped, and the Spy-glass, which
was by three or four hundred feet the tallest on the island, was likewise the strangest
in configuration, running up sheer from almost every side and then suddenly cut off at
the top like a pedestal to put a statue on.
The Hispaniola was rolling scuppers under in the ocean swell. The booms were
tearing at the blocks, the rudder was banging to and fro, and the whole ship creaking,
groaning, and jumping like a manufactory. I had to cling tight to the backstay, and the
world turned giddily before my eyes, for though I was a good enough sailor when there

Treasure Island P a g e | 83
was way on, this standing still and being rolled about like a bottle was a thing I never
learned to stand without a qualm or so, above all in the morning, on an empty stomach.
Perhaps it was this—perhaps it was the look of the island, with its grey, melancholy
woods, and wild stone spires, and the surf that we could both see and hear foaming
and thundering on the steep beach—at least, although the sun shone bright and hot,
and the shore birds were fishing and crying all around us, and you would have thought
anyone would have been glad to get to land after being so long at sea, my heart sank,
as the saying is, into my boots; and from the first look onward, I hated the very thought
of Treasure Island.
We had a dreary morning’s work before us, for there was no sign of any wind, and
the boats had to be got out and manned, and the ship warped three or four miles round
the corner of the island and up the narrow passage to the haven behind Skeleton Island.
I volunteered for one of the boats, where I had, of course, no business. The heat was
sweltering, and the men grumbled fiercely over their work. Anderson was in command
of my boat, and instead of keeping the crew in order, he grumbled as loud as the worst.
“Well,” he said with an oath, “it’s not forever.”
I thought this was a very bad sign, for up to that day the men had gone briskly and
willingly about their business; but the very sight of the island had relaxed the cords of
discipline.
All the way in, Long John stood by the steersman and conned the ship. He knew the
passage like the palm of his hand, and though the man in the chains got everywhere
more water than was down in the chart, John never hesitated once.
“There’s a strong scour with the ebb,” he said, “and this here passage has been dug
out, in a manner of speaking, with a spade.”
We brought up just where the anchor was in the chart, about a third of a mile from
each shore, the mainland on one side and Skeleton Island on the other. The bottom was
clean sand. The plunge of our anchor sent up clouds of birds wheeling and crying over
the woods, but in less than a minute they were down again and all was once more silent.
The place was entirely land-locked, buried in woods, the trees coming right down to
high-water mark, the shores mostly flat, and the hilltops standing round at a distance
in a sort of amphitheatre, one here, one there. Two little rivers, or rather two swamps,
emptied out into this pond, as you might call it; and the foliage round that part of the
shore had a kind of poisonous brightness. From the ship we could see nothing of the
house or stockade, for they were quite buried among trees; and if it had not been for
the chart on the companion, we might have been the first that had ever anchored there
since the island arose out of the seas.

Treasure Island P a g e | 84
 There was not a breath of air moving, nor a sound but that of the surf booming half
a mile away along the beaches and against the rocks outside. A peculiar stagnant smell
hung over the anchorage—a smell of sodden leaves and rotting tree trunks. I observed
the doctor sniffing and sniffing, like someone tasting a bad egg.
“I don’t know about treasure,” he said, “but I’ll stake my wig there’s fever here.”
If the conduct of the men had been alarming in the boat, it became truly threatening
when they had come aboard. They lay about the deck growling together in talk. The
slightest order was received with a black look and grudgingly and carelessly obeyed.
Even the honest hands must have caught the infection, for there was not one man
aboard to mend another. Mutiny, it was plain, hung over us like a thunder-cloud.
And it was not only we of the cabin party who perceived the danger. Long John was
hard at work going from group to group, spending himself in good advice, and as for
example no man could have shown a better. He fairly outstripped himself in willingness
and civility; he was all smiles to everyone. If an order were given, John would be on his
crutch in an instant, with the cheeriest “Aye, aye, sir!” in the world; and when there
was nothing else to do, he kept up one song after another, as if to conceal the
discontent of the rest.
Of all the gloomy features of that gloomy afternoon, this obvious anxiety on the part
of Long John appeared the worst.
We held a council in the cabin.
“Sir,” said the captain, “if I risk another order, the whole ship’ll come about our ears
by the run. You see, sir, here it is. I get a rough answer, do I not? Well, if I speak back,
pikes will be going in two shakes; if I don’t, Silver will see there’s something under that,
and the game’s up. Now, we’ve only one man to rely on.”
“And who is that?” asked the squire.
“Silver, sir,” returned the captain; “he’s as anxious as you and I to smother things up.
This is a tiff; he’d soon talk ’em out of it if he had the chance, and what I propose to do
is to give him the chance. Let’s allow the men an afternoon ashore. If they all go, why
we’ll fight the ship. If they none of them go, well then, we hold the cabin, and God
defend the right. If some go, you mark my words, sir, Silver’ll bring ’em aboard again as
mild as lambs.”
It was so decided; loaded pistols were served out to all the sure men; Hunter, Joyce,
and Redruth were taken into our confidence and received the news with less surprise
and a better spirit than we had looked for, and then the captain went on deck and
addressed the crew.

Treasure Island P a g e | 85
 “My lads,” said he, “we’ve had a hot day and are all tired and out of sorts. A turn
ashore’ll hurt nobody—the boats are still in the water; you can take the gigs, and as
many as please may go ashore for the afternoon. I’ll fire a gun half an hour before
sundown.”
I believe the silly fellows must have thought they would break their shins over
treasure as soon as they were landed, for they all came out of their sulks in a moment
and gave a cheer that started the echo in a faraway hill and sent the birds once more
flying and squalling round the anchorage.
The captain was too bright to be in the way. He whipped out of sight in a moment,
leaving Silver to arrange the party, and I fancy it was as well he did so. Had he been on
deck, he could no longer so much as have pretended not to understand the situation. It
was as plain as day. Silver was the captain, and a mighty rebellious crew he had of it.
The honest hands—and I was soon to see it proved that there were such on board—
must have been very stupid fellows. Or rather, I suppose the truth was this, that all
hands were disaffected by the example of the ringleaders—only some more, some less;
and a few, being good fellows in the main, could neither be led nor driven any further.
It is one thing to be idle and skulk and quite another to take a ship and murder a number
of innocent men.
At last, however, the party was made up. Six fellows were to stay on board, and the
remaining thirteen, including Silver, began to embark.
Then it was that there came into my head the first of the mad notions that
contributed so much to save our lives. If six men were left by Silver, it was plain our
party could not take and fight the ship; and since only six were left, it was equally plain
that the cabin party had no present need of my assistance. It occurred to me at once to
go ashore. In a jiffy I had slipped over the side and curled up in the fore-sheets of the
nearest boat, and almost at the same moment she shoved off.
No one took notice of me, only the bow oar saying, “Is that you, Jim? Keep your head
down.” But Silver, from the other boat, looked sharply over and called out to know if
that were me; and from that moment I began to regret what I had done.

Treasure Island P a g e | 86
 The crews raced for the beach, but the boat I was in, having some start and being at
once the lighter and the better manned, shot far ahead of her consort, and the bow had
struck among the shore-side trees and I had caught a branch and swung myself out and
plunged into the nearest thicket while Silver and the rest were still a hundred yards
behind.
“Jim, Jim!” I heard him shouting.
But you may suppose I paid no heed; jumping, ducking, and breaking through, I ran
straight before my nose till I could run no longer.

Treasure Island P a g e | 87
 The First Blow
I WAS so pleased at having given the slip to Long John that I began to enjoy myself
and look around me with some interest on the strange land that I was in.
I had crossed a marshy tract full of willows, bulrushes, and odd, outlandish, swampy
trees; and I had now come out upon the skirts of an open piece of undulating, sandy
country, about a mile long, dotted with a few pines and a great number of contorted
trees, not unlike the oak in growth, but pale in the foliage, like willows. On the far side
of the open stood one of the hills, with two quaint, craggy peaks shining vividly in the
sun.
I now felt for the first time the joy of exploration. The isle was uninhabited; my
shipmates I had left behind, and nothing lived in front of me but dumb brutes and fowls.
I turned hither and thither among the trees. Here and there were flowering plants,
unknown to me; here and there I saw snakes, and one raised his head from a ledge of
rock and hissed at me with a noise not unlike the spinning of a top. Little did I suppose
that he was a deadly enemy and that the noise was the famous rattle.
Then I came to a long thicket of these oaklike trees—live, or evergreen, oaks, I heard
afterwards they should be called—which grew low along the sand like brambles, the
boughs curiously twisted, the foliage compact, like thatch. The thicket stretched down

Treasure Island P a g e | 88
from the top of one of the sandy knolls, spreading and growing taller as it went, until it
reached the margin of the broad, reedy fen, through which the nearest of the little
rivers soaked its way into the anchorage. The marsh was steaming in the strong sun,
and the outline of the Spy-glass trembled through the haze.
All at once there began to go a sort of bustle among the bulrushes; a wild duck flew
up with a quack, another followed, and soon over the whole surface of the marsh a
great cloud of birds hung screaming and circling in the air. I judged at once that some
of my shipmates must be drawing near along the borders of the fen. Nor was I deceived,
for soon I heard the very distant and low tones of a human voice, which, as I continued
to give ear, grew steadily louder and nearer.
This put me in a great fear, and I crawled under cover of the nearest live-oak and
squatted there, hearkening, as silent as a mouse.
Another voice answered, and then the first voice, which I now recognized to be
Silver’s, once more took up the story and ran on for a long while in a stream, only now
and again interrupted by the other. By the sound they must have been talking earnestly,
and almost fiercely; but no distinct word came to my hearing.
At last the speakers seemed to have paused and perhaps to have sat down, for not
only did they cease to draw any nearer, but the birds themselves began to grow more
quiet and to settle again to their places in the swamp.
And now I began to feel that I was neglecting my business, that since I had been so
foolhardy as to come ashore with these desperadoes, the least I could do was to
overhear them at their councils, and that my plain and obvious duty was to draw as
close as I could manage, under the favourable ambush of the crouching trees.
I could tell the direction of the speakers pretty exactly, not only by the sound of their
voices but by the behaviour of the few birds that still hung in alarm above the heads of
the intruders.
Crawling on all fours, I made steadily but slowly towards them, till at last, raising my
head to an aperture among the leaves, I could see clear down into a little green dell
beside the marsh, and closely set about with trees, where Long John Silver and another
of the crew stood face to face in conversation.
The sun beat full upon them. Silver had thrown his hat beside him on the ground, and
his great, smooth, blond face, all shining with heat, was lifted to the other man’s in a
kind of appeal.
“Mate,” he was saying, “it’s because I thinks gold dust of you—gold dust, and you
may lay to that! If I hadn’t took to you like pitch, do you think I’d have been here a-
warning of you? All’s up—you can’t make nor mend; it’s to save your neck that I’m a-

Treasure Island P a g e | 89
speaking, and if one of the wild uns knew it, where’d I be, Tom—now, tell me, where’d
I be?”
“Silver,” said the other man—and I observed he was not only red in the face, but
spoke as hoarse as a crow, and his voice shook too, like a taut rope—“Silver,” says he,
“you’re old, and you’re honest, or has the name for it; and you’ve money too, which
lots of poor sailors hasn’t; and you’re brave, or I’m mistook. And will you tell me you’ll
let yourself be led away with that kind of a mess of swabs? Not you! As sure as God sees
me, I’d sooner lose my hand. If I turn agin my dooty—”
And then all of a sudden he was interrupted by a noise. I had found one of the honest
hands—well, here, at that same moment, came news of another. Far away out in the
marsh there arose, all of a sudden, a sound like the cry of anger, then another on the
back of it; and then one horrid, long-drawn scream. The rocks of the Spy-glass re-
echoed it a score of times; the whole troop of marsh-birds rose again, darkening
heaven, with a simultaneous whirr; and long after that death yell was still ringing in my
brain, silence had re-established its empire, and only the rustle of the redescending
birds and the boom of the distant surges disturbed the languor of the afternoon.
Tom had leaped at the sound, like a horse at the spur, but Silver had not winked an
eye. He stood where he was, resting lightly on his crutch, watching his companion like
a snake about to spring.
“John!” said the sailor, stretching out his hand.
“Hands off!” cried Silver, leaping back a yard, as it seemed to me, with the speed and
security of a trained gymnast.
“Hands off, if you like, John Silver,” said the other. “It’s a black conscience that can
make you feared of me. But in heaven’s name, tell me, what was that?”
“That?” returned Silver, smiling away, but warier than ever, his eye a mere pin-point
in his big face, but gleaming like a crumb of glass. “That? Oh, I reckon that’ll be Alan.”
And at this point Tom flashed out like a hero.
“Alan!” he cried. “Then rest his soul for a true seaman! And as for you, John Silver,
long you’ve been a mate of mine, but you’re mate of mine no more. If I die like a dog,
I’ll die in my dooty. You’ve killed Alan, have you? Kill me too, if you can. But I defies
you.”
And with that, this brave fellow turned his back directly on the cook and set off
walking for the beach. But he was not destined to go far. With a cry John seized the
branch of a tree, whipped the crutch out of his armpit, and sent that uncouth missile
hurtling through the air. It struck poor Tom, point foremost, and with stunning violence,

Treasure Island P a g e | 90
right between the shoulders in the middle of his back. His hands flew up, he gave a sort
of gasp, and fell.
Whether he were injured much or little, none could ever tell. Like enough, to judge
from the sound, his back was broken on the spot. But he had no time given him to
recover. Silver, agile as a monkey even without leg or crutch, was on the top of him next
moment and had twice buried his knife up to the hilt in that defenceless body. From my
place of ambush, I could hear him pant aloud as he struck the blows.
I do not know what it rightly is to faint, but I do know that for the next little while the
whole world swam away from before me in a whirling mist; Silver and the birds, and
the tall Spy-glass hilltop, going round and round and topsy-turvy before my eyes, and
all manner of bells ringing and distant voices shouting in my ear.
When I came again to myself the monster had pulled himself together, his crutch
under his arm, his hat upon his head. Just before him Tom lay motionless upon the
sward; but the murderer minded him not a whit, cleansing his blood-stained knife the
while upon a wisp of grass. Everything else was unchanged, the sun still shining
mercilessly on the steaming marsh and the tall pinnacle of the mountain, and I could
scarce persuade myself that murder had been actually done and a human life cruelly
cut short a moment since before my eyes.

Treasure Island P a g e | 91
Treasure Island P a g e | 92
 But now John put his hand into his pocket, brought out a whistle, and blew upon it
several modulated blasts that rang far across the heated air. I could not tell, of course,
the meaning of the signal, but it instantly awoke my fears. More men would be coming.
I might be discovered. They had already slain two of the honest people; after Tom and
Alan, might not I come next?
Instantly I began to extricate myself and crawl back again, with what speed and
silence I could manage, to the more open portion of the wood. As I did so, I could hear
hails coming and going between the old buccaneer and his comrades, and this sound of
danger lent me wings. As soon as I was clear of the thicket, I ran as I never ran before,
scarce minding the direction of my flight, so long as it led me from the murderers; and
as I ran, fear grew and grew upon me until it turned into a kind of frenzy.
Indeed, could anyone be more entirely lost than I? When the gun fired, how should I
dare to go down to the boats among those fiends, still smoking from their crime? Would
not the first of them who saw me wring my neck like a snipe’s? Would not my absence
itself be an evidence to them of my alarm, and therefore of my fatal knowledge? It was
all over, I thought. Good-bye to the Hispaniola; good-bye to the squire, the doctor, and
the captain! There was nothing left for me but death by starvation or death by the hands
of the mutineers.
All this while, as I say, I was still running, and without taking any notice, I had drawn
near to the foot of the little hill with the two peaks and had got into a part of the island
where the live-oaks grew more widely apart and seemed more like forest trees in their
bearing and dimensions. Mingled with these were a few scattered pines, some fifty,
some nearer seventy, feet high. The air too smelt more freshly than down beside the
marsh.
And here a fresh alarm brought me to a standstill with a thumping heart.

Treasure Island P a g e | 93
 The Man of the Island
FROM the side of the hill, which was here steep and stony, a spout of gravel was
dislodged and fell rattling and bounding through the trees. My eyes turned instinctively
in that direction, and I saw a figure leap with great rapidity behind the trunk of a pine.
What it was, whether bear or man or monkey, I could in no wise tell. It seemed dark
and shaggy; more I knew not. But the terror of this new apparition brought me to a
stand.
I was now, it seemed, cut off upon both sides; behind me the murderers, before me
this lurking nondescript. And immediately I began to prefer the dangers that I knew to
those I knew not. Silver himself appeared less terrible in contrast with this creature of
the woods, and I turned on my heel, and looking sharply behind me over my shoulder,
began to retrace my steps in the direction of the boats.
Instantly the figure reappeared, and making a wide circuit, began to head me off. I
was tired, at any rate; but had I been as fresh as when I rose, I could see it was in vain
for me to contend in speed with such an adversary. From trunk to trunk the creature
flitted like a deer, running manlike on two legs, but unlike any man that I had ever seen,
stooping almost double as it ran. Yet a man it was, I could no longer be in doubt about
that.

Treasure Island P a g e | 94
 I began to recall what I had heard of cannibals. I was within an ace of calling for help.
But the mere fact that he was a man, however wild, had somewhat reassured me, and
my fear of Silver began to revive in proportion. I stood still, therefore, and cast about
for some method of escape; and as I was so thinking, the recollection of my pistol
flashed into my mind. As soon as I remembered I was not defenceless, courage glowed
again in my heart and I set my face resolutely for this man of the island and walked
briskly towards him.
He was concealed by this time behind another tree trunk; but he must have been
watching me closely, for as soon as I began to move in his direction he reappeared and
took a step to meet me. Then he hesitated, drew back, came forward again, and at last,
to my wonder and confusion, threw himself on his knees and held out his clasped hands
in supplication.
At that I once more stopped.
“Who are you?” I asked.
“Ben Gunn,” he answered, and his voice sounded hoarse and awkward, like a rusty
lock. “I’m poor Ben Gunn, I am; and I haven’t spoke with a Christian these three years.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 95
Treasure Island P a g e | 96
 I could now see that he was a white man like myself and that his features were even
pleasing. His skin, wherever it was exposed, was burnt by the sun; even his lips were
black, and his fair eyes looked quite startling in so dark a face. Of all the beggar-men
that I had seen or fancied, he was the chief for raggedness. He was clothed with tatters
of old ship’s canvas and old sea-cloth, and this extraordinary patchwork was all held
together by a system of the most various and incongruous fastenings, brass buttons,
bits of stick, and loops of tarry gaskin. About his waist he wore an old brass-buckled
leather belt, which was the one thing solid in his whole accoutrement.
“Three years!” I cried. “Were you shipwrecked?”
“Nay, mate,” said he; “marooned.”
I had heard the word, and I knew it stood for a horrible kind of punishment common
enough among the buccaneers, in which the offender is put ashore with a little powder
and shot and left behind on some desolate and distant island.
“Marooned three years agone,” he continued, “and lived on goats since then, and
berries, and oysters. Wherever a man is, says I, a man can do for himself. But, mate, my
heart is sore for Christian diet. You mightn’t happen to have a piece of cheese about
you, now? No? Well, many’s the long night I’ve dreamed of cheese—toasted, mostly—
and woke up again, and here I were.”
“If ever I can get aboard again,” said I, “you shall have cheese by the stone.”
All this time he had been feeling the stuff of my jacket, smoothing my hands, looking
at my boots, and generally, in the intervals of his speech, showing a childish pleasure in
the presence of a fellow creature. But at my last words he perked up into a kind of
startled slyness.
“If ever you can get aboard again, says you?” he repeated. “Why, now, who’s to
hinder you?”
“Not you, I know,” was my reply.
“And right you was,” he cried. “Now you—what do you call yourself, mate?”
“Jim,” I told him.
“Jim, Jim,” says he, quite pleased apparently. “Well, now, Jim, I’ve lived that rough as
you’d be ashamed to hear of. Now, for instance, you wouldn’t think I had had a pious
mother—to look at me?” he asked.
“Why, no, not in particular,” I answered.
“Ah, well,” said he, “but I had—remarkable pious. And I was a civil, pious boy, and
could rattle off my catechism that fast, as you couldn’t tell one word from another. And
here’s what it come to, Jim, and it begun with chuck-farthen on the blessed grave-

Treasure Island P a g e | 97
stones! That’s what it begun with, but it went further’n that; and so my mother told
me, and predicked the whole, she did, the pious woman! But it were Providence that
put me here. I’ve thought it all out in this here lonely island, and I’m back on piety. You
don’t catch me tasting rum so much, but just a thimbleful for luck, of course, the first
chance I have. I’m bound I’ll be good, and I see the way to. And, Jim”—looking all round
him and lowering his voice to a whisper—“I’m rich.”
I now felt sure that the poor fellow had gone crazy in his solitude, and I suppose I
must have shown the feeling in my face, for he repeated the statement hotly: “Rich!
Rich! I says. And I’ll tell you what: I’ll make a man of you, Jim. Ah, Jim, you’ll bless your
stars, you will, you was the first that found me!”
And at this there came suddenly a lowering shadow over his face, and he tightened
his grasp upon my hand and raised a forefinger threateningly before my eyes.
“Now, Jim, you tell me true: that ain’t Flint’s ship?” he asked.
At this I had a happy inspiration. I began to believe that I had found an ally, and I
answered him at once.
“It’s not Flint’s ship, and Flint is dead; but I’ll tell you true, as you ask me—there are
some of Flint’s hands aboard; worse luck for the rest of us.”
“Not a man—with one—leg?” he gasped.
“Silver?” I asked.
“Ah, Silver!” says he. “That were his name.”
“He’s the cook, and the ringleader too.”
He was still holding me by the wrist, and at that he give it quite a wring.
“If you was sent by Long John,” he said, “I’m as good as pork, and I know it. But where
was you, do you suppose?”
I had made my mind up in a moment, and by way of answer told him the whole story
of our voyage and the predicament in which we found ourselves. He heard me with the
keenest interest, and when I had done he patted me on the head.
“You’re a good lad, Jim,” he said; “and you’re all in a clove hitch, ain’t you? Well, you
just put your trust in Ben Gunn—Ben Gunn’s the man to do it. Would you think it likely,
now, that your squire would prove a liberal-minded one in case of help—him being in a
clove hitch, as you remark?”
I told him the squire was the most liberal of men.
“Aye, but you see,” returned Ben Gunn, “I didn’t mean giving me a gate to keep, and
a suit of livery clothes, and such; that’s not my mark, Jim. What I mean is, would he be

Treasure Island P a g e | 98
likely to come down to the toon of, say one thousand pounds out of money that’s as
good as a man’s own already?”
“I am sure he would,” said I. “As it was, all hands were to share.”
“And a passage home?” he added with a look of great shrewdness.
“Why,” I cried, “the squire’s a gentleman. And besides, if we got rid of the others, we
should want you to help work the vessel home.”
“Ah,” said he, “so you would.” And he seemed very much relieved.
“Now, I’ll tell you what,” he went on. “So much I’ll tell you, and no more. I were in
Flint’s ship when he buried the treasure; he and six along—six strong seamen. They was
ashore nigh on a week, and us standing off and on in the old Walrus. One fine day up
went the signal, and here come Flint by himself in a little boat, and his head done up in
a blue scarf. The sun was getting up, and mortal white he looked about the cutwater.
But, there he was, you mind, and the six all dead—dead and buried. How he done it,
not a man aboard us could make out. It was battle, murder, and sudden death,
leastways—him against six. Billy Bones was the mate; Long John, he was quartermaster;
and they asked him where the treasure was. ‘Ah,’ says he, ‘you can go ashore, if you
like, and stay,’ he says; ‘but as for the ship, she’ll beat up for more, by thunder!’ That’s
what he said.
“Well, I was in another ship three years back, and we sighted this island. ‘Boys,’ said
I, ‘here’s Flint’s treasure; let’s land and find it.’ The cap’n was displeased at that, but my
messmates were all of a mind and landed. Twelve days they looked for it, and every day
they had the worse word for me, until one fine morning all hands went aboard. ‘As for
you, Benjamin Gunn,’ says they, ‘here’s a musket,’ they says, ‘and a spade, and pick-
axe. You can stay here and find Flint’s money for yourself,’ they says.
“Well, Jim, three years have I been here, and not a bite of Christian diet from that day
to this. But now, you look here; look at me. Do I look like a man before the mast? No,
says you. Nor I weren’t, neither, I says.”
And with that he winked and pinched me hard.
“Just you mention them words to your squire, Jim,” he went on. “Nor he weren’t,
neither—that’s the words. Three years he were the man of this island, light and dark,
fair and rain; and sometimes he would maybe think upon a prayer (says you), and
sometimes he would maybe think of his old mother, so be as she’s alive (you’ll say); but
the most part of Gunn’s time (this is what you’ll say)—the most part of his time was
took up with another matter. And then you’ll give him a nip, like I do.”
And he pinched me again in the most confidential manner.

Treasure Island P a g e | 99
 “Then,” he continued, “then you’ll up, and you’ll say this: Gunn is a good man (you’ll
say), and he puts a precious sight more confidence—a precious sight, mind that—in a
gen’leman born than in these gen’leman of fortune, having been one hisself.”
“Well,” I said, “I don’t understand one word that you’ve been saying. But that’s
neither here nor there; for how am I to get on board?”
“Ah,” said he, “that’s the hitch, for sure. Well, there’s my boat, that I made with my
two hands. I keep her under the white rock. If the worst come to the worst, we might
try that after dark. Hi!” he broke out. “What’s that?”
For just then, although the sun had still an hour or two to run, all the echoes of the
island awoke and bellowed to the thunder of a cannon.
“They have begun to fight!” I cried. “Follow me.”
And I began to run towards the anchorage, my terrors all forgotten, while close at my
side the marooned man in his goatskins trotted easily and lightly.
“Left, left,” says he; “keep to your left hand, mate Jim! Under the trees with you!
Theer’s where I killed my first goat. They don’t come down here now; they’re all
mastheaded on them mountings for the fear of Benjamin Gunn. Ah! And there’s the
cetemery”—cemetery, he must have meant. “You see the mounds? I come here and
prayed, nows and thens, when I thought maybe a Sunday would be about doo. It
weren’t quite a chapel, but it seemed more solemn like; and then, says you, Ben Gunn
was short-handed—no chapling, nor so much as a Bible and a flag, you says.”
So he kept talking as I ran, neither expecting nor receiving any answer.
The cannon-shot was followed after a considerable interval by a volley of small arms.
Another pause, and then, not a quarter of a mile in front of me, I beheld the Union
Jack flutter in the air above a wood.

Treasure Island P a g e | 100

 PART FOUR — THE STOCKADE

Narrative Continued by the Doctor: How the Ship Was

Abandoned
IT was about half past one—three bells in the sea phrase—that the two boats went
ashore from the Hispaniola. The captain, the squire, and I were talking matters over in
the cabin. Had there been a breath of wind, we should have fallen on the six mutineers
who were left aboard with us, slipped our cable, and away to sea. But the wind was
wanting; and to complete our helplessness, down came Hunter with the news that Jim
Hawkins had slipped into a boat and was gone ashore with the rest.
It never occurred to us to doubt Jim Hawkins, but we were alarmed for his safety.
With the men in the temper they were in, it seemed an even chance if we should see
the lad again. We ran on deck. The pitch was bubbling in the seams; the nasty stench of
the place turned me sick; if ever a man smelt fever and dysentery, it was in that
abominable anchorage. The six scoundrels were sitting grumbling under a sail in the
forecastle; ashore we could see the gigs made fast and a man sitting in each, hard by
where the river runs in. One of them was whistling “Lillibullero.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 101

 Waiting was a strain, and it was decided that Hunter and I should go ashore with the
jolly-boat in quest of information.
The gigs had leaned to their right, but Hunter and I pulled straight in, in the direction
of the stockade upon the chart. The two who were left guarding their boats seemed in
a bustle at our appearance; “Lillibullero” stopped off, and I could see the pair discussing
what they ought to do. Had they gone and told Silver, all might have turned out
differently; but they had their orders, I suppose, and decided to sit quietly where they
were and hark back again to “Lillibullero.”
There was a slight bend in the coast, and I steered so as to put it between us; even
before we landed we had thus lost sight of the gigs. I jumped out and came as near
running as I durst, with a big silk handkerchief under my hat for coolness’ sake and a
brace of pistols ready primed for safety.
I had not gone a hundred yards when I reached the stockade.
This was how it was: a spring of clear water rose almost at the top of a knoll. Well, on
the knoll, and enclosing the spring, they had clapped a stout loghouse fit to hold two
score of people on a pinch and loopholed for musketry on either side. All round this
they had cleared a wide space, and then the thing was completed by a paling six feet
high, without door or opening, too strong to pull down without time and labour and too
open to shelter the besiegers. The people in the log-house had them in every way; they
stood quiet in shelter and shot the others like partridges. All they wanted was a good
watch and food; for, short of a complete surprise, they might have held the place
against a regiment.
What particularly took my fancy was the spring. For though we had a good enough
place of it in the cabin of the Hispaniola, with plenty of arms and ammunition, and
things to eat, and excellent wines, there had been one thing overlooked—we had no
water. I was thinking this over when there came ringing over the island the cry of a man
at the point of death. I was not new to violent death—I have served his Royal Highness
the Duke of Cumberland, and got a wound myself at Fontenoy—but I know my pulse
went dot and carry one. “Jim Hawkins is gone,” was my first thought.
It is something to have been an old soldier, but more still to have been a doctor. There
is no time to dilly-dally in our work. And so now I made up my mind instantly, and with
no time lost returned to the shore and jumped on board the jolly-boat.
By good fortune Hunter pulled a good oar. We made the water fly, and the boat was
soon alongside and I aboard the schooner.

Treasure Island P a g e | 102

 I found them all shaken, as was natural. The squire was sitting down, as white as a
sheet, thinking of the harm he had led us to, the good soul! And one of the six forecastle
hands was little better.
“There’s a man,” says Captain Smollett, nodding towards him, “new to this work. He
came nigh-hand fainting, doctor, when he heard the cry. Another touch of the rudder
and that man would join us.”
I told my plan to the captain, and between us we settled on the details of its
accomplishment.
We put old Redruth in the gallery between the cabin and the forecastle, with three
or four loaded muskets and a mattress for protection. Hunter brought the boat round
under the stern-port, and Joyce and I set to work loading her with powder tins, muskets,
bags of biscuits, kegs of pork, a cask of cognac, and my invaluable medicine chest.
In the meantime, the squire and the captain stayed on deck, and the latter hailed the
coxswain, who was the principal man aboard.
“Mr. Hands,” he said, “here are two of us with a brace of pistols each. If any one of
you six make a signal of any description, that man’s dead.”
They were a good deal taken aback, and after a little consultation one and all tumbled
down the fore companion, thinking no doubt to take us on the rear. But when they saw
Redruth waiting for them in the sparred galley, they went about ship at once, and a
head popped out again on deck.
“Down, dog!” cries the captain.
And the head popped back again; and we heard no more, for the time, of these six
very faint-hearted seamen.

Treasure Island P a g e | 103

Treasure Island P a g e | 104
 By this time, tumbling things in as they came, we had the jolly-boat loaded as much
as we dared. Joyce and I got out through the stern-port, and we made for shore again
as fast as oars could take us.
This second trip fairly aroused the watchers along shore. “Lillibullero” was dropped
again; and just before we lost sight of them behind the little point, one of them whipped
ashore and disappeared. I had half a mind to change my plan and destroy their boats,
but I feared that Silver and the others might be close at hand, and all might very well be
lost by trying for too much.
We had soon touched land in the same place as before and set to provision the block
house. All three made the first journey, heavily laden, and tossed our stores over the
palisade. Then, leaving Joyce to guard them—one man, to be sure, but with half a dozen
muskets—Hunter and I returned to the jolly-boat and loaded ourselves once more. So
we proceeded without pausing to take breath, till the whole cargo was bestowed, when
the two servants took up their position in the block house, and I, with all my power,
sculled back to the Hispaniola.
That we should have risked a second boat load seems more daring than it really was.
They had the advantage of numbers, of course, but we had the advantage of arms. Not
one of the men ashore had a musket, and before they could get within range for pistol
shooting, we flattered ourselves we should be able to give a good account of a half-
dozen at least.
The squire was waiting for me at the stern window, all his faintness gone from him.
He caught the painter and made it fast, and we fell to loading the boat for our very lives.
Pork, powder, and biscuit was the cargo, with only a musket and a cutlass apiece for the
squire and me and Redruth and the captain. The rest of the arms and powder we
dropped overboard in two fathoms and a half of water, so that we could see the bright
steel shining far below us in the sun, on the clean, sandy bottom.
By this time the tide was beginning to ebb, and the ship was swinging round to her
anchor. Voices were heard faintly halloaing in the direction of the two gigs; and though
this reassured us for Joyce and Hunter, who were well to the eastward, it warned our
party to be off.
Redruth retreated from his place in the gallery and dropped into the boat, which we
then brought round to the ship’s counter, to be handier for Captain Smollett.
“Now, men,” said he, “do you hear me?”
There was no answer from the forecastle.
“It’s to you, Abraham Gray—it’s to you I am speaking.”
Still no reply.

Treasure Island P a g e | 105

 “Gray,” resumed Mr. Smollett, a little louder, “I am leaving this ship, and I order you
to follow your captain. I know you are a good man at bottom, and I dare say not one of
the lot of you’s as bad as he makes out. I have my watch here in my hand; I give you
thirty seconds to join me in.”
There was a pause.
“Come, my fine fellow,” continued the captain; “don’t hang so long in stays. I’m
risking my life and the lives of these good gentlemen every second.”
There was a sudden scuffle, a sound of blows, and out burst Abraham Gray with a
knife cut on the side of the cheek, and came running to the captain like a dog to the
whistle.
“I’m with you, sir,” said he.
And the next moment he and the captain had dropped aboard of us, and we had
shoved off and given way.
We were clear out of the ship, but not yet ashore in our stockade.

Treasure Island P a g e | 106

 Narrative Continued by the Doctor: The Jolly-boat’s Last
Trip
THIS fifth trip was quite different from any of the others. In the first place, the little
gallipot of a boat that we were in was gravely overloaded. Five grown men, and three
of them—Trelawney, Redruth, and the captain—over six feet high, was already more
than she was meant to carry. Add to that the powder, pork, and bread-bags. The
gunwale was lipping astern. Several times we shipped a little water, and my breeches
and the tails of my coat were all soaking wet before we had gone a hundred yards.
The captain made us trim the boat, and we got her to lie a little more evenly. All the
same, we were afraid to breathe.
In the second place, the ebb was now making—a strong rippling current running
westward through the basin, and then south’ard and seaward down the straits by which
we had entered in the morning. Even the ripples were a danger to our overloaded craft,
but the worst of it was that we were swept out of our true course and away from our
proper landing-place behind the point. If we let the current have its way we should
come ashore beside the gigs, where the pirates might appear at any moment.

Treasure Island P a g e | 107

 “I cannot keep her head for the stockade, sir,” said I to the captain. I was steering,
while he and Redruth, two fresh men, were at the oars. “The tide keeps washing her
down. Could you pull a little stronger?”
“Not without swamping the boat,” said he. “You must bear up, sir, if you please—
bear up until you see you’re gaining.”
I tried and found by experiment that the tide kept sweeping us westward until I had
laid her head due east, or just about right angles to the way we ought to go.
“We’ll never get ashore at this rate,” said I.
“If it’s the only course that we can lie, sir, we must even lie it,” returned the captain.
“We must keep upstream. You see, sir,” he went on, “if once we dropped to leeward of
the landing-place, it’s hard to say where we should get ashore, besides the chance of
being boarded by the gigs; whereas, the way we go the current must slacken, and then
we can dodge back along the shore.”
“The current’s less a’ready, sir,” said the man Gray, who was sitting in the fore-sheets;
“you can ease her off a bit.”
“Thank you, my man,” said I, quite as if nothing had happened, for we had all quietly
made up our minds to treat him like one of ourselves.
Suddenly the captain spoke up again, and I thought his voice was a little changed.
“The gun!” said he.
“I have thought of that,” said I, for I made sure he was thinking of a bombardment of
the fort. “They could never get the gun ashore, and if they did, they could never haul it
through the woods.”
“Look astern, doctor,” replied the captain.
We had entirely forgotten the long nine; and there, to our horror, were the five
rogues busy about her, getting off her jacket, as they called the stout tarpaulin cover
under which she sailed. Not only that, but it flashed into my mind at the same moment
that the round-shot and the powder for the gun had been left behind, and a stroke with
an axe would put it all into the possession of the evil ones abroad.
“Israel was Flint’s gunner,” said Gray hoarsely.
At any risk, we put the boat’s head direct for the landing-place. By this time we had
got so far out of the run of the current that we kept steerage way even at our necessarily
gentle rate of rowing, and I could keep her steady for the goal. But the worst of it was
that with the course I now held we turned our broadside instead of our stern to
the Hispaniola and offered a target like a barn door.

Treasure Island P a g e | 108

 I could hear as well as see that brandy-faced rascal Israel Hands plumping down a
round-shot on the deck.
“Who’s the best shot?” asked the captain.
“Mr. Trelawney, out and away,” said I.
“Mr. Trelawney, will you please pick me off one of these men, sir? Hands, if possible,”
said the captain.
Trelawney was as cool as steel. He looked to the priming of his gun.
“Now,” cried the captain, “easy with that gun, sir, or you’ll swamp the boat. All hands
stand by to trim her when he aims.”
The squire raised his gun, the rowing ceased, and we leaned over to the other side to
keep the balance, and all was so nicely contrived that we did not ship a drop.
They had the gun, by this time, slewed round upon the swivel, and Hands, who was
at the muzzle with the rammer, was in consequence the most exposed. However, we
had no luck, for just as Trelawney fired, down he stooped, the ball whistled over him,
and it was one of the other four who fell.
The cry he gave was echoed not only by his companions on board but by a great
number of voices from the shore, and looking in that direction I saw the other pirates
trooping out from among the trees and tumbling into their places in the boats.
“Here come the gigs, sir,” said I.
“Give way, then,” cried the captain. “We mustn’t mind if we swamp her now. If we
can’t get ashore, all’s up.”
“Only one of the gigs is being manned, sir,” I added; “the crew of the other most likely
going round by shore to cut us off.”
“They’ll have a hot run, sir,” returned the captain. “Jack ashore, you know. It’s not
them I mind; it’s the round-shot. Carpet bowls! My lady’s maid couldn’t miss. Tell us,
squire, when you see the match, and we’ll hold water.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 109

Treasure Island P a g e | 110
 In the meanwhile we had been making headway at a good pace for a boat so
overloaded, and we had shipped but little water in the process. We were now close in;
thirty or forty strokes and we should beach her, for the ebb had already disclosed a
narrow belt of sand below the clustering trees. The gig was no longer to be feared; the
little point had already concealed it from our eyes. The ebb-tide, which had so cruelly
delayed us, was now making reparation and delaying our assailants. The one source of
danger was the gun.
“If I durst,” said the captain, “I’d stop and pick off another man.”
But it was plain that they meant nothing should delay their shot. They had never so
much as looked at their fallen comrade, though he was not dead, and I could see him
trying to crawl away.
“Ready!” cried the squire.
“Hold!” cried the captain, quick as an echo.
And he and Redruth backed with a great heave that sent her stern bodily under water.
The report fell in at the same instant of time. This was the first that Jim heard, the sound
of the squire’s shot not having reached him. Where the ball passed, not one of us
precisely knew, but I fancy it must have been over our heads and that the wind of it
may have contributed to our disaster.
At any rate, the boat sank by the stern, quite gently, in three feet of water, leaving
the captain and myself, facing each other, on our feet. The other three took complete
headers, and came up again drenched and bubbling.
So far there was no great harm. No lives were lost, and we could wade ashore in
safety. But there were all our stores at the bottom, and to make things worse, only two
guns out of five remained in a state for service. Mine I had snatched from my knees and
held over my head, by a sort of instinct. As for the captain, he had carried his over his
shoulder by a bandoleer, and like a wise man, lock uppermost. The other three had
gone down with the boat.
To add to our concern, we heard voices already drawing near us in the woods along
shore, and we had not only the danger of being cut off from the stockade in our half-
crippled state but the fear before us whether, if Hunter and Joyce were attacked by half
a dozen, they would have the sense and conduct to stand firm. Hunter was steady, that
we knew; Joyce was a doubtful case—a pleasant, polite man for a valet and to brush
one’s clothes, but not entirely fitted for a man of war.
With all this in our minds, we waded ashore as fast as we could, leaving behind us the
poor jolly-boat and a good half of all our powder and provisions.

Treasure Island P a g e | 111

 Narrative Continued by the Doctor: End of the First Day’s
Fighting
WE made our best speed across the strip of wood that now divided us from the
stockade, and at every step we took the voices of the buccaneers rang nearer. Soon we
could hear their footfalls as they ran and the cracking of the branches as they breasted
across a bit of thicket.
I began to see we should have a brush for it in earnest and looked to my priming.
“Captain,” said I, “Trelawney is the dead shot. Give him your gun; his own is useless.”
They exchanged guns, and Trelawney, silent and cool as he had been since the
beginning of the bustle, hung a moment on his heel to see that all was fit for service. At
the same time, observing Gray to be unarmed, I handed him my cutlass. It did all our
hearts good to see him spit in his hand, knit his brows, and make the blade sing through
the air. It was plain from every line of his body that our new hand was worth his salt.
Forty paces farther we came to the edge of the wood and saw the stockade in front
of us. We struck the enclosure about the middle of the south side, and almost at the
same time, seven mutineers—Job Anderson, the boatswain, at their head—appeared
in full cry at the southwestern corner.

Treasure Island P a g e | 112

 They paused as if taken aback, and before they recovered, not only the squire and I,
but Hunter and Joyce from the block house, had time to fire. The four shots came in
rather a scattering volley, but they did the business: one of the enemy actually fell, and
the rest, without hesitation, turned and plunged into the trees.
After reloading, we walked down the outside of the palisade to see to the fallen
enemy. He was stone dead—shot through the heart.
We began to rejoice over our good success when just at that moment a pistol cracked
in the bush, a ball whistled close past my ear, and poor Tom Redruth stumbled and fell
his length on the ground. Both the squire and I returned the shot, but as we had nothing
to aim at, it is probable we only wasted powder. Then we reloaded and turned our
attention to poor Tom.
The captain and Gray were already examining him, and I saw with half an eye that all
was over.
I believe the readiness of our return volley had scattered the mutineers once more,
for we were suffered without further molestation to get the poor old gamekeeper
hoisted over the stockade and carried, groaning and bleeding, into the log-house.
Poor old fellow, he had not uttered one word of surprise, complaint, fear, or even
acquiescence from the very beginning of our troubles till now, when we had laid him
down in the log-house to die. He had lain like a Trojan behind his mattress in the gallery;
he had followed every order silently, doggedly, and well; he was the oldest of our party
by a score of years; and now, sullen, old, serviceable servant, it was he that was to die.
The squire dropped down beside him on his knees and kissed his hand, crying like a
child.
“Be I going, doctor?” he asked.
“Tom, my man,” said I, “you’re going home.”
“I wish I had had a lick at them with the gun first,” he replied.
“Tom,” said the squire, “say you forgive me, won’t you?”
“Would that be respectful like, from me to you, squire?” was the answer.
“Howsoever, so be it, amen!”
After a little while of silence, he said he thought somebody might read a prayer. “It’s
the custom, sir,” he added apologetically. And not long after, without another word, he
passed away.
In the meantime the captain, whom I had observed to be wonderfully swollen about
the chest and pockets, had turned out a great many various stores—the British colours,
a Bible, a coil of stoutish rope, pen, ink, the log-book, and pounds of tobacco. He had

Treasure Island P a g e | 113

found a longish fir-tree lying felled and trimmed in the enclosure, and with the help of
Hunter he had set it up at the corner of the log-house where the trunks crossed and
made an angle. Then, climbing on the roof, he had with his own hand bent and run up
the colours.
This seemed mightily to relieve him. He re-entered the log-house and set about
counting up the stores as if nothing else existed. But he had an eye on Tom’s passage
for all that, and as soon as all was over, came forward with another flag and reverently
spread it on the body.
“Don’t you take on, sir,” he said, shaking the squire’s hand. “All’s well with him; no
fear for a hand that’s been shot down in his duty to captain and owner. It mayn’t be
good divinity, but it’s a fact.”
Then he pulled me aside.
“Dr. Livesey,” he said, “in how many weeks do you and squire expect the consort?”
I told him it was a question not of weeks but of months, that if we were not back by
the end of August Blandly was to send to find us, but neither sooner nor later. “You can
calculate for yourself,” I said.
“Why, yes,” returned the captain, scratching his head; “and making a large allowance,
sir, for all the gifts of Providence, I should say we were pretty close hauled.”
“How do you mean?” I asked.
“It’s a pity, sir, we lost that second load. That’s what I mean,” replied the captain. “As
for powder and shot, we’ll do. But the rations are short, very short—so short, Dr.
Livesey, that we’re perhaps as well without that extra mouth.”
And he pointed to the dead body under the flag.
Just then, with a roar and a whistle, a round-shot passed high above the roof of the
log-house and plumped far beyond us in the wood.
“Oho!” said the captain. “Blaze away! You’ve little enough powder already, my lads.”
At the second trial, the aim was better, and the ball descended inside the stockade,
scattering a cloud of sand but doing no further damage.
“Captain,” said the squire, “the house is quite invisible from the ship. It must be the
flag they are aiming at. Would it not be wiser to take it in?”
“Strike my colours!” cried the captain. “No, sir, not I”; and as soon as he had said the
words, I think we all agreed with him. For it was not only a piece of stout, seamanly,
good feeling; it was good policy besides and showed our enemies that we despised their
cannonade.

Treasure Island P a g e | 114

 All through the evening they kept thundering away. Ball after ball flew over or fell
short or kicked up the sand in the enclosure, but they had to fire so high that the shot
fell dead and buried itself in the soft sand. We had no ricochet to fear, and though one
popped in through the roof of the log-house and out again through the floor, we soon
got used to that sort of horse-play and minded it no more than cricket.
“There is one good thing about all this,” observed the captain; “the wood in front of
us is likely clear. The ebb has made a good while; our stores should be uncovered.
Volunteers to go and bring in pork.”
Gray and Hunter were the first to come forward. Well armed, they stole out of the
stockade, but it proved a useless mission. The mutineers were bolder than we fancied
or they put more trust in Israel’s gunnery. For four or five of them were busy carrying
off our stores and wading out with them to one of the gigs that lay close by, pulling an
oar or so to hold her steady against the current. Silver was in the stern-sheets in
command; and every man of them was now provided with a musket from some secret
magazine of their own.
The captain sat down to his log, and here is the beginning of the entry:
Alexander Smollett, master; David Livesey, ship’s doctor; Abraham Gray,
carpenter’s mate; John Trelawney, owner; John Hunter and Richard Joyce, owner’s
servants, landsmen—being all that is left faithful of the ship’s company—with stores
for ten days at short rations, came ashore this day and flew British colours on the
log-house in Treasure Island. Thomas Redruth, owner’s servant, landsman, shot by
the mutineers; James Hawkins, cabin-boy—
And at the same time, I was wondering over poor Jim Hawkins’ fate.
A hail on the land side.
“Somebody hailing us,” said Hunter, who was on guard.
“Doctor! Squire! Captain! Hullo, Hunter, is that you?” came the cries.
And I ran to the door in time to see Jim Hawkins, safe and sound, come climbing over
the stockade.

Treasure Island P a g e | 115

Treasure Island P a g e | 116
 Narrative Resumed by Jim Hawkins: The Garrison in the
Stockade
AS soon as Ben Gunn saw the colours he came to a halt, stopped me by the arm, and
sat down.
“Now,” said he, “there’s your friends, sure enough.”
“Far more likely it’s the mutineers,” I answered.
“That!” he cried. “Why, in a place like this, where nobody puts in but gen’lemen of
fortune, Silver would fly the Jolly Roger, you don’t make no doubt of that. No, that’s
your friends. There’s been blows too, and I reckon your friends has had the best of it;
and here they are ashore in the old stockade, as was made years and years ago by Flint.
Ah, he was the man to have a headpiece, was Flint! Barring rum, his match were never
seen. He were afraid of none, not he; on’y Silver—Silver was that genteel.”
“Well,” said I, “that may be so, and so be it; all the more reason that I should hurry
on and join my friends.”
“Nay, mate,” returned Ben, “not you. You’re a good boy, or I’m mistook; but you’re
on’y a boy, all told. Now, Ben Gunn is fly. Rum wouldn’t bring me there, where you’re

Treasure Island P a g e | 117

going—not rum wouldn’t, till I see your born gen’leman and gets it on his word of
honour. And you won’t forget my words; ‘A precious sight (that’s what you’ll say), a
precious sight more confidence’—and then nips him.”
And he pinched me the third time with the same air of cleverness.
“And when Ben Gunn is wanted, you know where to find him, Jim. Just wheer you
found him today. And him that comes is to have a white thing in his hand, and he’s to
come alone. Oh! And you’ll say this: ‘Ben Gunn,’ says you, ‘has reasons of his own.’”
“Well,” said I, “I believe I understand. You have something to propose, and you wish
to see the squire or the doctor, and you’re to be found where I found you. Is that all?”
“And when? says you,” he added. “Why, from about noon observation to about six
bells.”
“Good,” said I, “and now may I go?”
“You won’t forget?” he inquired anxiously. “Precious sight, and reasons of his own,
says you. Reasons of his own; that’s the mainstay; as between man and man. Well,
then”—still holding me—“I reckon you can go, Jim. And, Jim, if you was to see Silver,
you wouldn’t go for to sell Ben Gunn? Wild horses wouldn’t draw it from you? No, says
you. And if them pirates camp ashore, Jim, what would you say but there’d be widders
in the morning?”
Here he was interrupted by a loud report, and a cannonball came tearing through the
trees and pitched in the sand not a hundred yards from where we two were talking. The
next moment each of us had taken to his heels in a different direction.
For a good hour to come frequent reports shook the island, and balls kept crashing
through the woods. I moved from hiding-place to hiding-place, always pursued, or so it
seemed to me, by these terrifying missiles. But towards the end of the bombardment,
though still I durst not venture in the direction of the stockade, where the balls fell
oftenest, I had begun, in a manner, to pluck up my heart again, and after a long detour
to the east, crept down among the shore-side trees.
The sun had just set, the sea breeze was rustling and tumbling in the woods and
ruffling the grey surface of the anchorage; the tide, too, was far out, and great tracts of
sand lay uncovered; the air, after the heat of the day, chilled me through my jacket.
The Hispaniola still lay where she had anchored; but, sure enough, there was the Jolly
Roger—the black flag of piracy—flying from her peak. Even as I looked, there came
another red flash and another report that sent the echoes clattering, and one more
round-shot whistled through the air. It was the last of the cannonade.
I lay for some time watching the bustle which succeeded the attack. Men were
demolishing something with axes on the beach near the stockade—the poor jolly-boat,

Treasure Island P a g e | 118

I afterwards discovered. Away, near the mouth of the river, a great fire was glowing
among the trees, and between that point and the ship one of the gigs kept coming and
going, the men, whom I had seen so gloomy, shouting at the oars like children. But there
was a sound in their voices which suggested rum.
At length I thought I might return towards the stockade. I was pretty far down on the
low, sandy spit that encloses the anchorage to the east, and is joined at half-water to
Skeleton Island; and now, as I rose to my feet, I saw, some distance further down the
spit and rising from among low bushes, an isolated rock, pretty high, and peculiarly
white in colour. It occurred to me that this might be the white rock of which Ben Gunn
had spoken and that some day or other a boat might be wanted and I should know
where to look for one.
Then I skirted among the woods until I had regained the rear, or shoreward side, of
the stockade, and was soon warmly welcomed by the faithful party.
I had soon told my story and began to look about me. The log-house was made of
unsquared trunks of pine—roof, walls, and floor. The latter stood in several places as
much as a foot or a foot and a half above the surface of the sand. There was a porch at
the door, and under this porch the little spring welled up into an artificial basin of a
rather odd kind—no other than a great ship’s kettle of iron, with the bottom knocked
out, and sunk “to her bearings,” as the captain said, among the sand.
Little had been left besides the framework of the house, but in one corner there was
a stone slab laid down by way of hearth and an old rusty iron basket to contain the fire.
The slopes of the knoll and all the inside of the stockade had been cleared of timber
to build the house, and we could see by the stumps what a fine and lofty grove had
been destroyed. Most of the soil had been washed away or buried in drift after the
removal of the trees; only where the streamlet ran down from the kettle a thick bed of
moss and some ferns and little creeping bushes were still green among the sand. Very
close around the stockade—too close for defence, they said—the wood still flourished
high and dense, all of fir on the land side, but towards the sea with a large admixture of
live-oaks.
The cold evening breeze, of which I have spoken, whistled through every chink of the
rude building and sprinkled the floor with a continual rain of fine sand. There was sand
in our eyes, sand in our teeth, sand in our suppers, sand dancing in the spring at the
bottom of the kettle, for all the world like porridge beginning to boil. Our chimney was
a square hole in the roof; it was but a little part of the smoke that found its way out,
and the rest eddied about the house and kept us coughing and piping the eye.

Treasure Island P a g e | 119

 Add to this that Gray, the new man, had his face tied up in a bandage for a cut he had
got in breaking away from the mutineers and that poor old Tom Redruth, still unburied,
lay along the wall, stiff and stark, under the Union Jack.
If we had been allowed to sit idle, we should all have fallen in the blues, but Captain
Smollett was never the man for that. All hands were called up before him, and he
divided us into watches. The doctor and Gray and I for one; the squire, Hunter, and
Joyce upon the other. Tired though we all were, two were sent out for firewood; two
more were set to dig a grave for Redruth; the doctor was named cook; I was put sentry
at the door; and the captain himself went from one to another, keeping up our spirits
and lending a hand wherever it was wanted.
From time to time the doctor came to the door for a little air and to rest his eyes,
which were almost smoked out of his head, and whenever he did so, he had a word for
me.
“That man Smollett,” he said once, “is a better man than I am. And when I say that it
means a deal, Jim.”
Another time he came and was silent for a while. Then he put his head on one side,
and looked at me.
“Is this Ben Gunn a man?” he asked.
“I do not know, sir,” said I. “I am not very sure whether he’s sane.”
“If there’s any doubt about the matter, he is,” returned the doctor. “A man who has
been three years biting his nails on a desert island, Jim, can’t expect to appear as sane
as you or me. It doesn’t lie in human nature. Was it cheese you said he had a fancy for?”
“Yes, sir, cheese,” I answered.
“Well, Jim,” says he, “just see the good that comes of being dainty in your food.
You’ve seen my snuff-box, haven’t you? And you never saw me take snuff, the reason
being that in my snuff-box I carry a piece of Parmesan cheese—a cheese made in Italy,
very nutritious. Well, that’s for Ben Gunn!”
Before supper was eaten we buried old Tom in the sand and stood round him for a
while bare-headed in the breeze. A good deal of firewood had been got in, but not
enough for the captain’s fancy, and he shook his head over it and told us we “must get
back to this tomorrow rather livelier.” Then, when we had eaten our pork and each had
a good stiff glass of brandy grog, the three chiefs got together in a corner to discuss our
prospects.

Treasure Island P a g e | 120

 It appears they were at their wits’ end what to do, the stores being so low that we
must have been starved into surrender long before help came. But our best hope, it was
decided, was to kill off the buccaneers until they either hauled down their flag or ran
away with the Hispaniola. From nineteen they were already reduced to fifteen, two

Treasure Island P a g e | 121

others were wounded, and one at least—the man shot beside the gun—severely
wounded, if he were not dead. Every time we had a crack at them, we were to take it,
saving our own lives, with the extremest care. And besides that, we had two able
allies—rum and the climate.
As for the first, though we were about half a mile away, we could hear them roaring
and singing late into the night; and as for the second, the doctor staked his wig that,
camped where they were in the marsh and unprovided with remedies, the half of them
would be on their backs before a week.
“So,” he added, “if we are not all shot down first they’ll be glad to be packing in the
schooner. It’s always a ship, and they can get to buccaneering again, I suppose.”
“First ship that ever I lost,” said Captain Smollett.
I was dead tired, as you may fancy; and when I got to sleep, which was not till after a
great deal of tossing, I slept like a log of wood.
The rest had long been up and had already breakfasted and increased the pile of
firewood by about half as much again when I was wakened by a bustle and the sound
of voices.
“Flag of truce!” I heard someone say; and then, immediately after, with a cry of
surprise, “Silver himself!”
And at that, up I jumped, and rubbing my eyes, ran to a loophole in the wall.

Treasure Island P a g e | 122

 Silver’s Embassy
SURE enough, there were two men just outside the stockade, one of them waving a
white cloth, the other, no less a person than Silver himself, standing placidly by.
It was still quite early, and the coldest morning that I think I ever was abroad in—a
chill that pierced into the marrow. The sky was bright and cloudless overhead, and the
tops of the trees shone rosily in the sun. But where Silver stood with his lieutenant, all
was still in shadow, and they waded knee-deep in a low white vapour that had crawled
during the night out of the morass. The chill and the vapour taken together told a poor
tale of the island. It was plainly a damp, feverish, unhealthy spot.
“Keep indoors, men,” said the captain. “Ten to one this is a trick.”
Then he hailed the buccaneer.
“Who goes? Stand, or we fire.”
“Flag of truce,” cried Silver.
The captain was in the porch, keeping himself carefully out of the way of a
treacherous shot, should any be intended. He turned and spoke to us, “Doctor’s watch
on the lookout. Dr. Livesey take the north side, if you please; Jim, the east; Gray, west.
The watch below, all hands to load muskets. Lively, men, and careful.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 123

 And then he turned again to the mutineers.
“And what do you want with your flag of truce?” he cried.
This time it was the other man who replied.
“Cap’n Silver, sir, to come on board and make terms,” he shouted.
“Cap’n Silver! Don’t know him. Who’s he?” cried the captain. And we could hear him
adding to himself, “Cap’n, is it? My heart, and here’s promotion!”
Long John answered for himself. “Me, sir. These poor lads have chosen me cap’n,
after your desertion, sir”—laying a particular emphasis upon the word “desertion.”
“We’re willing to submit, if we can come to terms, and no bones about it. All I ask is
your word, Cap’n Smollett, to let me safe and sound out of this here stockade, and one
minute to get out o’ shot before a gun is fired.”
“My man,” said Captain Smollett, “I have not the slightest desire to talk to you. If you
wish to talk to me, you can come, that’s all. If there’s any treachery, it’ll be on your side,
and the Lord help you.”
“That’s enough, cap’n,” shouted Long John cheerily. “A word from you’s enough. I
know a gentleman, and you may lay to that.”
We could see the man who carried the flag of truce attempting to hold Silver back.
Nor was that wonderful, seeing how cavalier had been the captain’s answer. But Silver
laughed at him aloud and slapped him on the back as if the idea of alarm had been
absurd. Then he advanced to the stockade, threw over his crutch, got a leg up, and with
great vigour and skill succeeded in surmounting the fence and dropping safely to the
other side.
I will confess that I was far too much taken up with what was going on to be of the
slightest use as sentry; indeed, I had already deserted my eastern loophole and crept
up behind the captain, who had now seated himself on the threshold, with his elbows
on his knees, his head in his hands, and his eyes fixed on the water as it bubbled out of
the old iron kettle in the sand. He was whistling “Come, Lasses and Lads.”
Silver had terrible hard work getting up the knoll. What with the steepness of the
incline, the thick tree stumps, and the soft sand, he and his crutch were as helpless as
a ship in stays. But he stuck to it like a man in silence, and at last arrived before the
captain, whom he saluted in the handsomest style. He was tricked out in his best; an
immense blue coat, thick with brass buttons, hung as low as to his knees, and a fine
laced hat was set on the back of his head.
“Here you are, my man,” said the captain, raising his head. “You had better sit down.”
“You ain’t a-going to let me inside, cap’n?” complained Long John. “It’s a main cold
morning, to be sure, sir, to sit outside upon the sand.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 124

 “Why, Silver,” said the captain, “if you had pleased to be an honest man, you might
have been sitting in your galley. It’s your own doing. You’re either my ship’s cook—and
then you were treated handsome—or Cap’n Silver, a common mutineer and pirate, and
then you can go hang!”
“Well, well, cap’n,” returned the sea-cook, sitting down as he was bidden on the sand,
“you’ll have to give me a hand up again, that’s all. A sweet pretty place you have of it
here. Ah, there’s Jim! The top of the morning to you, Jim. Doctor, here’s my service.
Why, there you all are together like a happy family, in a manner of speaking.”

“If you have anything to say, my man, better say it,” said the captain.
“Right you were, Cap’n Smollett,” replied Silver. “Dooty is dooty, to be sure. Well
now, you look here, that was a good lay of yours last night. I don’t deny it was a good
lay. Some of you pretty handy with a handspike-end. And I’ll not deny neither but what
some of my people was shook—maybe all was shook; maybe I was shook myself; maybe
that’s why I’m here for terms. But you mark me, cap’n, it won’t do twice, by thunder!
We’ll have to do sentry-go and ease off a point or so on the rum. Maybe you think we
were all a sheet in the wind’s eye. But I’ll tell you I was sober; I was on’y dog tired; and
if I’d awoke a second sooner, I’d ’a caught you at the act, I would. He wasn’t dead when
I got round to him, not he.”
“Well?” says Captain Smollett as cool as can be.

Treasure Island P a g e | 125

 All that Silver said was a riddle to him, but you would never have guessed it from his
tone. As for me, I began to have an inkling. Ben Gunn’s last words came back to my
mind. I began to suppose that he had paid the buccaneers a visit while they all lay drunk
together round their fire, and I reckoned up with glee that we had only fourteen
enemies to deal with.
“Well, here it is,” said Silver. “We want that treasure, and we’ll have it—that’s our
point! You would just as soon save your lives, I reckon; and that’s yours. You have a
chart, haven’t you?”
“That’s as may be,” replied the captain.
“Oh, well, you have, I know that,” returned Long John. “You needn’t be so husky with
a man; there ain’t a particle of service in that, and you may lay to it. What I mean is, we
want your chart. Now, I never meant you no harm, myself.”
“That won’t do with me, my man,” interrupted the captain. “We know exactly what
you meant to do, and we don’t care, for now, you see, you can’t do it.”
And the captain looked at him calmly and proceeded to fill a pipe.
“If Abe Gray—” Silver broke out.
“Avast there!” cried Mr. Smollett. “Gray told me nothing, and I asked him nothing;
and what’s more, I would see you and him and this whole island blown clean out of the
water into blazes first. So there’s my mind for you, my man, on that.”
This little whiff of temper seemed to cool Silver down. He had been growing nettled
before, but now he pulled himself together.
“Like enough,” said he. “I would set no limits to what gentlemen might consider
shipshape, or might not, as the case were. And seein’ as how you are about to take a
pipe, cap’n, I’ll make so free as do likewise.”
And he filled a pipe and lighted it; and the two men sat silently smoking for quite a
while, now looking each other in the face, now stopping their tobacco, now leaning
forward to spit. It was as good as the play to see them.
“Now,” resumed Silver, “here it is. You give us the chart to get the treasure by, and
drop shooting poor seamen and stoving of their heads in while asleep. You do that, and
we’ll offer you a choice. Either you come aboard along of us, once the treasure shipped,
and then I’ll give you my affy-davy, upon my word of honour, to clap you somewhere
safe ashore. Or if that ain’t to your fancy, some of my hands being rough and having old
scores on account of hazing, then you can stay here, you can. We’ll divide stores with
you, man for man; and I’ll give my affy-davy, as before to speak the first ship I sight, and
send ’em here to pick you up. Now, you’ll own that’s talking. Handsomer you couldn’t

Treasure Island P a g e | 126

look to get, now you. And I hope”—raising his voice—“that all hands in this here block
house will overhaul my words, for what is spoke to one is spoke to all.”
Captain Smollett rose from his seat and knocked out the ashes of his pipe in the palm
of his left hand.
“Is that all?” he asked.
“Every last word, by thunder!” answered John. “Refuse that, and you’ve seen the last
of me but musket-balls.”
“Very good,” said the captain. “Now you’ll hear me. If you’ll come up one by one,
unarmed, I’ll engage to clap you all in irons and take you home to a fair trial in England.
If you won’t, my name is Alexander Smollett, I’ve flown my sovereign’s colours, and I’ll
see you all to Davy Jones. You can’t find the treasure. You can’t sail the ship—there’s
not a man among you fit to sail the ship. You can’t fight us—Gray, there, got away from
five of you. Your ship’s in irons, Master Silver; you’re on a lee shore, and so you’ll find.
I stand here and tell you so; and they’re the last good words you’ll get from me, for in
the name of heaven, I’ll put a bullet in your back when next I meet you. Tramp, my lad.
Bundle out of this, please, hand over hand, and double quick.”
Silver’s face was a picture; his eyes started in his head with wrath. He shook the fire
out of his pipe.
“Give me a hand up!” he cried.
“Not I,” returned the captain.
“Who’ll give me a hand up?” he roared.
Not a man among us moved. Growling the foulest imprecations, he crawled along the
sand till he got hold of the porch and could hoist himself again upon his crutch. Then he
spat into the spring.
“There!” he cried. “That’s what I think of ye. Before an hour’s out, I’ll stove in your
old block house like a rum puncheon. Laugh, by thunder, laugh! Before an hour’s out,
ye’ll laugh upon the other side. Them that die’ll be the lucky ones.”
And with a dreadful oath he stumbled off, ploughed down the sand, was helped
across the stockade, after four or five failures, by the man with the flag of truce, and
disappeared in an instant afterwards among the trees.

Treasure Island P a g e | 127

 The Attack
AS soon as Silver disappeared, the captain, who had been closely watching him,
turned towards the interior of the house and found not a man of us at his post but Gray.
It was the first time we had ever seen him angry.
“Quarters!” he roared. And then, as we all slunk back to our places, “Gray,” he said,
“I’ll put your name in the log; you’ve stood by your duty like a seaman. Mr. Trelawney,
I’m surprised at you, sir. Doctor, I thought you had worn the king’s coat! If that was how
you served at Fontenoy, sir, you’d have been better in your berth.”
The doctor’s watch were all back at their loopholes, the rest were busy loading the
spare muskets, and everyone with a red face, you may be certain, and a flea in his ear,
as the saying is.
The captain looked on for a while in silence. Then he spoke.
“My lads,” said he, “I’ve given Silver a broadside. I pitched it in red-hot on purpose;
and before the hour’s out, as he said, we shall be boarded. We’re outnumbered, I
needn’t tell you that, but we fight in shelter; and a minute ago I should have said we
fought with discipline. I’ve no manner of doubt that we can drub them, if you choose.”
Then he went the rounds and saw, as he said, that all was clear.

Treasure Island P a g e | 128

 On the two short sides of the house, east and west, there were only two loopholes;
on the south side where the porch was, two again; and on the north side, five. There
was a round score of muskets for the seven of us; the firewood had been built into four
piles—tables, you might say—one about the middle of each side, and on each of these
tables some ammunition and four loaded muskets were laid ready to the hand of the
defenders. In the middle, the cutlasses lay ranged.
“Toss out the fire,” said the captain; “the chill is past, and we mustn’t have smoke in
our eyes.”
The iron fire-basket was carried bodily out by Mr. Trelawney, and the embers
smothered among sand.
“Hawkins hasn’t had his breakfast. Hawkins, help yourself, and back to your post to
eat it,” continued Captain Smollett. “Lively, now, my lad; you’ll want it before you’ve
done. Hunter, serve out a round of brandy to all hands.”
And while this was going on, the captain completed, in his own mind, the plan of the
defence.
“Doctor, you will take the door,” he resumed. “See, and don’t expose yourself; keep
within, and fire through the porch. Hunter, take the east side, there. Joyce, you stand
by the west, my man. Mr. Trelawney, you are the best shot—you and Gray will take this
long north side, with the five loopholes; it’s there the danger is. If they can get up to it
and fire in upon us through our own ports, things would begin to look dirty. Hawkins,
neither you nor I are much account at the shooting; we’ll stand by to load and bear a
hand.”
As the captain had said, the chill was past. As soon as the sun had climbed above our
girdle of trees, it fell with all its force upon the clearing and drank up the vapours at a
draught. Soon the sand was baking and the resin melting in the logs of the block house.
Jackets and coats were flung aside, shirts thrown open at the neck and rolled up to the
shoulders; and we stood there, each at his post, in a fever of heat and anxiety.
An hour passed away.
“Hang them!” said the captain. “This is as dull as the doldrums. Gray, whistle for a
wind.”
And just at that moment came the first news of the attack.
“If you please, sir,” said Joyce, “if I see anyone, am I to fire?”
“I told you so!” cried the captain.
“Thank you, sir,” returned Joyce with the same quiet civility.

Treasure Island P a g e | 129

 Nothing followed for a time, but the remark had set us all on the alert, straining ears
and eyes—the musketeers with their pieces balanced in their hands, the captain out in
the middle of the block house with his mouth very tight and a frown on his face.
So some seconds passed, till suddenly Joyce whipped up his musket and fired. The
report had scarcely died away ere it was repeated and repeated from without in a
scattering volley, shot behind shot, like a string of geese, from every side of the
enclosure. Several bullets struck the log-house, but not one entered; and as the smoke
cleared away and vanished, the stockade and the woods around it looked as quiet and
empty as before. Not a bough waved, not the gleam of a musket-barrel betrayed the
presence of our foes.
“Did you hit your man?” asked the captain.
“No, sir,” replied Joyce. “I believe not, sir.”
“Next best thing to tell the truth,” muttered Captain Smollett. “Load his gun, Hawkins.
How many should say there were on your side, doctor?”
“I know precisely,” said Dr. Livesey. “Three shots were fired on this side. I saw the
three flashes—two close together—one farther to the west.”
“Three!” repeated the captain. “And how many on yours, Mr. Trelawney?”
But this was not so easily answered. There had come many from the north—seven by
the squire’s computation, eight or nine according to Gray. From the east and west only
a single shot had been fired. It was plain, therefore, that the attack would be developed
from the north and that on the other three sides we were only to be annoyed by a show
of hostilities. But Captain Smollett made no change in his arrangements. If the
mutineers succeeded in crossing the stockade, he argued, they would take possession
of any unprotected loophole and shoot us down like rats in our own stronghold.
Nor had we much time left to us for thought. Suddenly, with a loud huzza, a little
cloud of pirates leaped from the woods on the north side and ran straight on the
stockade. At the same moment, the fire was once more opened from the woods, and a
rifle ball sang through the doorway and knocked the doctor’s musket into bits.
The boarders swarmed over the fence like monkeys. Squire and Gray fired again and
yet again; three men fell, one forwards into the enclosure, two back on the outside. But
of these, one was evidently more frightened than hurt, for he was on his feet again in a
crack and instantly disappeared among the trees.

Treasure Island P a g e | 130

 Two had bit the dust, one had fled, four had made good their footing inside our
defences, while from the shelter of the woods seven or eight men, each evidently
supplied with several muskets, kept up a hot though useless fire on the log-house.
The four who had boarded made straight before them for the building, shouting as
they ran, and the men among the trees shouted back to encourage them. Several shots
were fired, but such was the hurry of the marksmen that not one appears to have taken
effect. In a moment, the four pirates had swarmed up the mound and were upon us.
The head of Job Anderson, the boatswain, appeared at the middle loophole.
“At ’em, all hands—all hands!” he roared in a voice of thunder.
At the same moment, another pirate grasped Hunter’s musket by the muzzle,
wrenched it from his hands, plucked it through the loophole, and with one stunning
blow, laid the poor fellow senseless on the floor. Meanwhile a third, running unharmed
all around the house, appeared suddenly in the doorway and fell with his cutlass on the
doctor.
Our position was utterly reversed. A moment since we were firing, under cover, at an
exposed enemy; now it was we who lay uncovered and could not return a blow.

Treasure Island P a g e | 131

 The log-house was full of smoke, to which we owed our comparative safety. Cries and
confusion, the flashes and reports of pistol-shots, and one loud groan rang in my ears.
“Out, lads, out, and fight ’em in the open! Cutlasses!” cried the captain.
I snatched a cutlass from the pile, and someone, at the same time snatching another,
gave me a cut across the knuckles which I hardly felt. I dashed out of the door into the
clear sunlight. Someone was close behind, I knew not whom. Right in front, the doctor
was pursuing his assailant down the hill, and just as my eyes fell upon him, beat down
his guard and sent him sprawling on his back with a great slash across the face.
“Round the house, lads! Round the house!” cried the captain; and even in the hurly-
burly, I perceived a change in his voice.
Mechanically, I obeyed, turned eastwards, and with my cutlass raised, ran round the
corner of the house. Next moment I was face to face with Anderson. He roared aloud,
and his hanger went up above his head, flashing in the sunlight. I had not time to be
afraid, but as the blow still hung impending, leaped in a trice upon one side, and missing
my foot in the soft sand, rolled headlong down the slope.
When I had first sallied from the door, the other mutineers had been already
swarming up the palisade to make an end of us. One man, in a red night-cap, with his
cutlass in his mouth, had even got upon the top and thrown a leg across. Well, so short
had been the interval that when I found my feet again all was in the same posture, the
fellow with the red night-cap still half-way over, another still just showing his head
above the top of the stockade. And yet, in this breath of time, the fight was over and
the victory was ours.
Gray, following close behind me, had cut down the big boatswain ere he had time to
recover from his last blow. Another had been shot at a loophole in the very act of firing
into the house and now lay in agony, the pistol still smoking in his hand. A third, as I had
seen, the doctor had disposed of at a blow. Of the four who had scaled the palisade,
one only remained unaccounted for, and he, having left his cutlass on the field, was
now clambering out again with the fear of death upon him.
“Fire—fire from the house!” cried the doctor. “And you, lads, back into cover.”
But his words were unheeded, no shot was fired, and the last boarder made good his
escape and disappeared with the rest into the wood. In three seconds nothing remained
of the attacking party but the five who had fallen, four on the inside and one on the
outside of the palisade.
The doctor and Gray and I ran full speed for shelter. The survivors would soon be back
where they had left their muskets, and at any moment the fire might recommence.

Treasure Island P a g e | 132

 The house was by this time somewhat cleared of smoke, and we saw at a glance the
price we had paid for victory. Hunter lay beside his loophole, stunned; Joyce by his, shot
through the head, never to move again; while right in the centre, the squire was
supporting the captain, one as pale as the other.
“The captain’s wounded,” said Mr. Trelawney.
“Have they run?” asked Mr. Smollett.
“All that could, you may be bound,” returned the doctor; “but there’s five of them
will never run again.”
“Five!” cried the captain. “Come, that’s better. Five against three leaves us four to
nine. That’s better odds than we had at starting. We were seven to nineteen then, or
thought we were, and that’s as bad to bear.” *
*The mutineers were soon only eight in number, for the man shot by Mr. Trelawney
on board the schooner died that same evening of his wound. But this was, of course,
not known till after by the faithful party.

Treasure Island P a g e | 133

 PART FIVE — MY SEA ADVENTURE

How My Sea Adventure Began

THERE was no return of the mutineers—not so much as another shot out of the
woods. They had “got their rations for that day,” as the captain put it, and we had the
place to ourselves and a quiet time to overhaul the wounded and get dinner. Squire and
I cooked outside in spite of the danger, and even outside we could hardly tell what we
were at, for horror of the loud groans that reached us from the doctor’s patients.
Out of the eight men who had fallen in the action, only three still breathed—that one
of the pirates who had been shot at the loophole, Hunter, and Captain Smollett; and of
these, the first two were as good as dead; the mutineer indeed died under the doctor’s
knife, and Hunter, do what we could, never recovered consciousness in this world. He
lingered all day, breathing loudly like the old buccaneer at home in his apoplectic fit,
but the bones of his chest had been crushed by the blow and his skull fractured in falling,
and some time in the following night, without sign or sound, he went to his Maker.
As for the captain, his wounds were grievous indeed, but not dangerous. No organ
was fatally injured. Anderson’s ball—for it was Job that shot him first—had broken his
shoulder-blade and touched the lung, not badly; the second had only torn and displaced

Treasure Island P a g e | 134

some muscles in the calf. He was sure to recover, the doctor said, but in the meantime,
and for weeks to come, he must not walk nor move his arm, nor so much as speak when
he could help it.
My own accidental cut across the knuckles was a flea-bite. Doctor Livesey patched it
up with plaster and pulled my ears for me into the bargain.
After dinner the squire and the doctor sat by the captain’s side awhile in consultation;
and when they had talked to their hearts’ content, it being then a little past noon, the
doctor took up his hat and pistols, girt on a cutlass, put the chart in his pocket, and with
a musket over his shoulder crossed the palisade on the north side and set off briskly
through the trees.
Gray and I were sitting together at the far end of the block house, to be out of earshot
of our officers consulting; and Gray took his pipe out of his mouth and fairly forgot to
put it back again, so thunder-struck he was at this occurrence.
“Why, in the name of Davy Jones,” said he, “is Dr. Livesey mad?”
“Why no,” says I. “He’s about the last of this crew for that, I take it.”
“Well, shipmate,” said Gray, “mad he may not be; but if he’s not, you mark my
words, I am.”
“I take it,” replied I, “the doctor has his idea; and if I am right, he’s going now to see
Ben Gunn.”
I was right, as appeared later; but in the meantime, the house being stifling hot and
the little patch of sand inside the palisade ablaze with midday sun, I began to get
another thought into my head, which was not by any means so right. What I began to
do was to envy the doctor walking in the cool shadow of the woods with the birds about
him and the pleasant smell of the pines, while I sat grilling, with my clothes stuck to the
hot resin, and so much blood about me and so many poor dead bodies lying all around
that I took a disgust of the place that was almost as strong as fear.
All the time I was washing out the block house, and then washing up the things from
dinner, this disgust and envy kept growing stronger and stronger, till at last, being near
a bread-bag, and no one then observing me, I took the first step towards my escapade
and filled both pockets of my coat with biscuit.
I was a fool, if you like, and certainly I was going to do a foolish, over-bold act; but I
was determined to do it with all the precautions in my power. These biscuits, should
anything befall me, would keep me, at least, from starving till far on in the next day.
The next thing I laid hold of was a brace of pistols, and as I already had a powder-horn
and bullets, I felt myself well supplied with arms.

Treasure Island P a g e | 135

 As for the scheme I had in my head, it was not a bad one in itself. I was to go down
the sandy spit that divides the anchorage on the east from the open sea, find the white
rock I had observed last evening, and ascertain whether it was there or not that Ben
Gunn had hidden his boat, a thing quite worth doing, as I still believe. But as I was
certain I should not be allowed to leave the enclosure, my only plan was to take French
leave and slip out when nobody was watching, and that was so bad a way of doing it as
made the thing itself wrong. But I was only a boy, and I had made my mind up.
Well, as things at last fell out, I found an admirable opportunity. The squire and Gray
were busy helping the captain with his bandages, the coast was clear, I made a bolt for
it over the stockade and into the thickest of the trees, and before my absence was
observed I was out of cry of my companions.
This was my second folly, far worse than the first, as I left but two sound men to guard
the house; but like the first, it was a help towards saving all of us.
I took my way straight for the east coast of the island, for I was determined to go
down the sea side of the spit to avoid all chance of observation from the anchorage. It
was already late in the afternoon, although still warm and sunny. As I continued to
thread the tall woods, I could hear from far before me not only the continuous thunder
of the surf, but a certain tossing of foliage and grinding of boughs which showed me the
sea breeze had set in higher than usual. Soon cool draughts of air began to reach me,
and a few steps farther I came forth into the open borders of the grove, and saw the
sea lying blue and sunny to the horizon and the surf tumbling and tossing its foam along
the beach.
I have never seen the sea quiet round Treasure Island. The sun might blaze overhead,
the air be without a breath, the surface smooth and blue, but still these great rollers
would be running along all the external coast, thundering and thundering by day and
night; and I scarce believe there is one spot in the island where a man would be out of
earshot of their noise.
I walked along beside the surf with great enjoyment, till, thinking I was now got far
enough to the south, I took the cover of some thick bushes and crept warily up to the
ridge of the spit.
Behind me was the sea, in front the anchorage. The sea breeze, as though it had the
sooner blown itself out by its unusual violence, was already at an end; it had been
succeeded by light, variable airs from the south and south-east, carrying great banks of
fog; and the anchorage, under lee of Skeleton Island, lay still and leaden as when first
we entered it. The Hispaniola, in that unbroken mirror, was exactly portrayed from the
truck to the waterline, the Jolly Roger hanging from her peak.

Treasure Island P a g e | 136

 Alongside lay one of the gigs, Silver in the stern-sheets—him I could always
recognize—while a couple of men were leaning over the stern bulwarks, one of them
with a red cap—the very rogue that I had seen some hours before stride-legs upon the
palisade. Apparently they were talking and laughing, though at that distance—upwards
of a mile—I could, of course, hear no word of what was said. All at once there began
the most horrid, unearthly screaming, which at first startled me badly, though I had
soon remembered the voice of Captain Flint and even thought I could make out the bird
by her bright plumage as she sat perched upon her master’s wrist.
Soon after, the jolly-boat shoved off and pulled for shore, and the man with the red
cap and his comrade went below by the cabin companion.
Just about the same time, the sun had gone down behind the Spy-glass, and as the
fog was collecting rapidly, it began to grow dark in earnest. I saw I must lose no time if
I were to find the boat that evening.
The white rock, visible enough above the brush, was still some eighth of a mile further
down the spit, and it took me a goodish while to get up with it, crawling, often on all
fours, among the scrub. Night had almost come when I laid my hand on its rough sides.
Right below it there was an exceedingly small hollow of green turf, hidden by banks and
a thick underwood about knee-deep, that grew there very plentifully; and in the centre
of the dell, sure enough, a little tent of goat-skins, like what the gipsies carry about with
them in England.
I dropped into the hollow, lifted the side of the tent, and there was Ben Gunn’s boat—
home-made if ever anything was home-made; a rude, lop-sided framework of tough
wood, and stretched upon that a covering of goat-skin, with the hair inside. The thing
was extremely small, even for me, and I can hardly imagine that it could have floated
with a full-sized man. There was one thwart set as low as possible, a kind of stretcher
in the bows, and a double paddle for propulsion.

Treasure Island P a g e | 137

 I had not then seen a coracle, such as the ancient Britons made, but I have seen one
since, and I can give you no fairer idea of Ben Gunn’s boat than by saying it was like the
first and the worst coracle ever made by man. But the great advantage of the coracle it
certainly possessed, for it was exceedingly light and portable.
Well, now that I had found the boat, you would have thought I had had enough of
truantry for once, but in the meantime I had taken another notion and become so
obstinately fond of it that I would have carried it out, I believe, in the teeth of Captain
Smollett himself. This was to slip out under cover of the night, cut the Hispaniola adrift,
and let her go ashore where she fancied. I had quite made up my mind that the
mutineers, after their repulse of the morning, had nothing nearer their hearts than to
up anchor and away to sea; this, I thought, it would be a fine thing to prevent, and now
that I had seen how they left their watchmen unprovided with a boat, I thought it might
be done with little risk.
Down I sat to wait for darkness, and made a hearty meal of biscuit. It was a night out
of ten thousand for my purpose. The fog had now buried all heaven. As the last rays of
daylight dwindled and disappeared, absolute blackness settled down on Treasure
Island. And when, at last, I shouldered the coracle and groped my way stumblingly out

Treasure Island P a g e | 138

of the hollow where I had supped, there were but two points visible on the whole
anchorage.
One was the great fire on shore, by which the defeated pirates lay carousing in the
swamp. The other, a mere blur of light upon the darkness, indicated the position of the
anchored ship. She had swung round to the ebb—her bow was now towards me—the
only lights on board were in the cabin, and what I saw was merely a reflection on the
fog of the strong rays that flowed from the stern window.
The ebb had already run some time, and I had to wade through a long belt of swampy
sand, where I sank several times above the ankle, before I came to the edge of the
retreating water, and wading a little way in, with some strength and dexterity, set my
coracle, keel downwards, on the surface.

Treasure Island P a g e | 139

 The Ebb-Tide Runs
HE coracle—as I had ample reason to know before I was done with her—was a very
safe boat for a person of my height and weight, both buoyant and clever in a seaway;
but she was the most cross-grained, lop-sided craft to manage. Do as you pleased, she
always made more leeway than anything else, and turning round and round was the
manoeuvre she was best at. Even Ben Gunn himself has admitted that she was “queer
to handle till you knew her way.”
Certainly I did not know her way. She turned in every direction but the one I was
bound to go; the most part of the time we were broadside on, and I am very sure I never
should have made the ship at all but for the tide. By good fortune, paddle as I pleased,
the tide was still sweeping me down; and there lay the Hispaniola right in the fairway,
hardly to be missed.
First she loomed before me like a blot of something yet blacker than darkness, then
her spars and hull began to take shape, and the next moment, as it seemed (for, the
farther I went, the brisker grew the current of the ebb), I was alongside of her hawser
and had laid hold.
The hawser was as taut as a bowstring, and the current so strong she pulled upon her
anchor. All round the hull, in the blackness, the rippling current bubbled and chattered

Treasure Island P a g e | 140

like a little mountain stream. One cut with my sea-gully and the Hispaniola would go
humming down the tide.
So far so good, but it next occurred to my recollection that a taut hawser, suddenly
cut, is a thing as dangerous as a kicking horse. Ten to one, if I were so foolhardy as to
cut the Hispaniola from her anchor, I and the coracle would be knocked clean out of the
water.
This brought me to a full stop, and if fortune had not again particularly favoured me,
I should have had to abandon my design. But the light airs which had begun blowing
from the south-east and south had hauled round after nightfall into the south-west.
Just while I was meditating, a puff came, caught the Hispaniola, and forced her up into
the current; and to my great joy, I felt the hawser slacken in my grasp, and the hand by
which I held it dip for a second under water.
With that I made my mind up, took out my gully, opened it with my teeth, and cut
one strand after another, till the vessel swung only by two. Then I lay quiet, waiting to
sever these last when the strain should be once more lightened by a breath of wind.
All this time I had heard the sound of loud voices from the cabin, but to say truth, my
mind had been so entirely taken up with other thoughts that I had scarcely given ear.
Now, however, when I had nothing else to do, I began to pay more heed.
One I recognized for the coxswain’s, Israel Hands, that had been Flint’s gunner in
former days. The other was, of course, my friend of the red night-cap. Both men were
plainly the worse of drink, and they were still drinking, for even while I was listening,
one of them, with a drunken cry, opened the stern window and threw out something,
which I divined to be an empty bottle. But they were not only tipsy; it was plain that
they were furiously angry. Oaths flew like hailstones, and every now and then there
came forth such an explosion as I thought was sure to end in blows. But each time the
quarrel passed off and the voices grumbled lower for a while, until the next crisis came
and in its turn passed away without result.
On shore, I could see the glow of the great camp-fire burning warmly through the
shore-side trees. Someone was singing, a dull, old, droning sailor’s song, with a droop
and a quaver at the end of every verse, and seemingly no end to it at all but the patience
of the singer. I had heard it on the voyage more than once and remembered these
words:
“But one man of her crew alive,
What put to sea with seventy-five.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 141

 And I thought it was a ditty rather too dolefully appropriate for a company that had
met such cruel losses in the morning. But, indeed, from what I saw, all these buccaneers
were as callous as the sea they sailed on.
At last the breeze came; the schooner sidled and drew nearer in the dark; I felt the
hawser slacken once more, and with a good, tough effort, cut the last fibres through.
The breeze had but little action on the coracle, and I was almost instantly swept
against the bows of the Hispaniola. At the same time, the schooner began to turn upon
her heel, spinning slowly, end for end, across the current.
I wrought like a fiend, for I expected every moment to be swamped; and since I found
I could not push the coracle directly off, I now shoved straight astern. At length I was
clear of my dangerous neighbour, and just as I gave the last impulsion, my hands came
across a light cord that was trailing overboard across the stern bulwarks. Instantly I
grasped it.
Why I should have done so I can hardly say. It was at first mere instinct, but once I
had it in my hands and found it fast, curiosity began to get the upper hand, and I
determined I should have one look through the cabin window.
I pulled in hand over hand on the cord, and when I judged myself near enough, rose
at infinite risk to about half my height and thus commanded the roof and a slice of the
interior of the cabin.
By this time the schooner and her little consort were gliding pretty swiftly through
the water; indeed, we had already fetched up level with the camp-fire. The ship was
talking, as sailors say, loudly, treading the innumerable ripples with an incessant
weltering splash; and until I got my eye above the window-sill I could not comprehend
why the watchmen had taken no alarm. One glance, however, was sufficient; and it was
only one glance that I durst take from that unsteady skiff. It showed me Hands and his
companion locked together in deadly wrestle, each with a hand upon the other’s throat.

Treasure Island P a g e | 142

Treasure Island P a g e | 143
 I dropped upon the thwart again, none too soon, for I was near overboard. I could
see nothing for the moment but these two furious, encrimsoned faces swaying together
under the smoky lamp, and I shut my eyes to let them grow once more familiar with
the darkness.
The endless ballad had come to an end at last, and the whole diminished company
about the camp-fire had broken into the chorus I had heard so often:
“Fifteen men on the dead man’s chest—
Yo-ho-ho, and a bottle of rum!
Drink and the devil had done for the rest—
Yo-ho-ho, and a bottle of rum!”

I was just thinking how busy drink and the devil were at that very moment in the cabin
of the Hispaniola, when I was surprised by a sudden lurch of the coracle. At the same
moment, she yawed sharply and seemed to change her course. The speed in the
meantime had strangely increased.
I opened my eyes at once. All round me were little ripples, combing over with a sharp,
bristling sound and slightly phosphorescent. The Hispaniola herself, a few yards in
whose wake I was still being whirled along, seemed to stagger in her course, and I saw
her spars toss a little against the blackness of the night; nay, as I looked longer, I made
sure she also was wheeling to the southward.
I glanced over my shoulder, and my heart jumped against my ribs. There, right behind
me, was the glow of the camp-fire. The current had turned at right angles, sweeping
round along with it the tall schooner and the little dancing coracle; ever quickening,
ever bubbling higher, ever muttering louder, it went spinning through the narrows for
the open sea.
Suddenly the schooner in front of me gave a violent yaw, turning, perhaps, through
twenty degrees; and almost at the same moment one shout followed another from on
board; I could hear feet pounding on the companion ladder and I knew that the two
drunkards had at last been interrupted in their quarrel and awakened to a sense of their
disaster.
I lay down flat in the bottom of that wretched skiff and devoutly recommended my
spirit to its Maker. At the end of the straits, I made sure we must fall into some bar of
raging breakers, where all my troubles would be ended speedily; and though I could,
perhaps, bear to die, I could not bear to look upon my fate as it approached.
So I must have lain for hours, continually beaten to and fro upon the billows, now and
again wetted with flying sprays, and never ceasing to expect death at the next plunge.

Treasure Island P a g e | 144

Gradually weariness grew upon me; a numbness, an occasional stupor, fell upon my
mind even in the midst of my terrors, until sleep at last supervened and in my sea-
tossed coracle I lay and dreamed of home and the old Admiral Benbow.

Treasure Island P a g e | 145

 The Cruise of the Coracle
IT was broad day when I awoke and found myself tossing at the south-west end of
Treasure Island. The sun was up but was still hid from me behind the great bulk of the
Spy-glass, which on this side descended almost to the sea in formidable cliffs.
Haulbowline Head and Mizzen-mast Hill were at my elbow, the hill bare and dark, the
head bound with cliffs forty or fifty feet high and fringed with great masses of fallen
rock. I was scarce a quarter of a mile to seaward, and it was my first thought to paddle
in and land.
That notion was soon given over. Among the fallen rocks the breakers spouted and
bellowed; loud reverberations, heavy sprays flying and falling, succeeded one another
from second to second; and I saw myself, if I ventured nearer, dashed to death upon
the rough shore or spending my strength in vain to scale the beetling crags.
Nor was that all, for crawling together on flat tables of rock or letting themselves drop
into the sea with loud reports I beheld huge slimy monsters—soft snails, as it were, of
incredible bigness—two or three score of them together, making the rocks to echo with
their barkings.

Treasure Island P a g e | 146

 I have understood since that they were sea lions, and entirely harmless. But the look
of them, added to the difficulty of the shore and the high running of the surf, was more
than enough to disgust me of that landing-place. I felt willing rather to starve at sea
than to confront such perils.

Treasure Island P a g e | 147

Treasure Island P a g e | 148
 In the meantime I had a better chance, as I supposed, before me. North of
Haulbowline Head, the land runs in a long way, leaving at low tide a long stretch of
yellow sand. To the north of that, again, there comes another cape—Cape of the
Woods, as it was marked upon the chart—buried in tall green pines, which descended
to the margin of the sea.
I remembered what Silver had said about the current that sets northward along the
whole west coast of Treasure Island, and seeing from my position that I was already
under its influence, I preferred to leave Haulbowline Head behind me and reserve my
strength for an attempt to land upon the kindlier-looking Cape of the Woods.
There was a great, smooth swell upon the sea. The wind blowing steady and gentle
from the south, there was no contrariety between that and the current, and the billows
rose and fell unbroken.
Had it been otherwise, I must long ago have perished; but as it was, it is surprising
how easily and securely my little and light boat could ride. Often, as I still lay at the
bottom and kept no more than an eye above the gunwale, I would see a big blue summit
heaving close above me; yet the coracle would but bounce a little, dance as if on springs,
and subside on the other side into the trough as lightly as a bird.
I began after a little to grow very bold and sat up to try my skill at paddling. But even
a small change in the disposition of the weight will produce violent changes in the
behaviour of a coracle. And I had hardly moved before the boat, giving up at once her
gentle dancing movement, ran straight down a slope of water so steep that it made me
giddy, and struck her nose, with a spout of spray, deep into the side of the next wave.
I was drenched and terrified, and fell instantly back into my old position, whereupon
the coracle seemed to find her head again and led me as softly as before among the
billows. It was plain she was not to be interfered with, and at that rate, since I could in
no way influence her course, what hope had I left of reaching land?
I began to be horribly frightened, but I kept my head, for all that. First, moving with
all care, I gradually baled out the coracle with my sea-cap; then, getting my eye once
more above the gunwale, I set myself to study how it was she managed to slip so quietly
through the rollers.
I found each wave, instead of the big, smooth glossy mountain it looks from shore or
from a vessel’s deck, was for all the world like any range of hills on dry land, full of peaks
and smooth places and valleys. The coracle, left to herself, turning from side to side,
threaded, so to speak, her way through these lower parts and avoided the steep slopes
and higher, toppling summits of the wave.

Treasure Island P a g e | 149

 “Well, now,” thought I to myself, “it is plain I must lie where I am and not disturb the
balance; but it is plain also that I can put the paddle over the side and from time to time,
in smooth places, give her a shove or two towards land.” No sooner thought upon than
done. There I lay on my elbows in the most trying attitude, and every now and again
gave a weak stroke or two to turn her head to shore.
It was very tiring and slow work, yet I did visibly gain ground; and as we drew near
the Cape of the Woods, though I saw I must infallibly miss that point, I had still made
some hundred yards of easting. I was, indeed, close in. I could see the cool green tree-
tops swaying together in the breeze, and I felt sure I should make the next promontory
without fail.
It was high time, for I now began to be tortured with thirst. The glow of the sun from
above, its thousandfold reflection from the waves, the sea-water that fell and dried
upon me, caking my very lips with salt, combined to make my throat burn and my brain
ache. The sight of the trees so near at hand had almost made me sick with longing, but
the current had soon carried me past the point, and as the next reach of sea opened
out, I beheld a sight that changed the nature of my thoughts.
Right in front of me, not half a mile away, I beheld the Hispaniola under sail. I made
sure, of course, that I should be taken; but I was so distressed for want of water that I
scarce knew whether to be glad or sorry at the thought, and long before I had come to
a conclusion, surprise had taken entire possession of my mind and I could do nothing
but stare and wonder.
The Hispaniola was under her main-sail and two jibs, and the beautiful white canvas
shone in the sun like snow or silver. When I first sighted her, all her sails were drawing;
she was lying a course about north-west, and I presumed the men on board were going
round the island on their way back to the anchorage. Presently she began to fetch more
and more to the westward, so that I thought they had sighted me and were going about
in chase. At last, however, she fell right into the wind’s eye, was taken dead aback, and
stood there awhile helpless, with her sails shivering.
“Clumsy fellows,” said I; “they must still be drunk as owls.” And I thought how Captain
Smollett would have set them skipping.
Meanwhile the schooner gradually fell off and filled again upon another tack, sailed
swiftly for a minute or so, and brought up once more dead in the wind’s eye. Again and
again was this repeated. To and fro, up and down, north, south, east, and west,
the Hispaniola sailed by swoops and dashes, and at each repetition ended as she had
begun, with idly flapping canvas. It became plain to me that nobody was steering. And
if so, where were the men? Either they were dead drunk or had deserted her, I thought,
and perhaps if I could get on board I might return the vessel to her captain.

Treasure Island P a g e | 150

 The current was bearing coracle and schooner southward at an equal rate. As for the
latter’s sailing, it was so wild and intermittent, and she hung each time so long in irons,
that she certainly gained nothing, if she did not even lose. If only I dared to sit up and
paddle, I made sure that I could overhaul her. The scheme had an air of adventure that
inspired me, and the thought of the water breaker beside the fore companion doubled
my growing courage.
Up I got, was welcomed almost instantly by another cloud of spray, but this time stuck
to my purpose and set myself, with all my strength and caution, to paddle after the
unsteered Hispaniola. Once I shipped a sea so heavy that I had to stop and bail, with my
heart fluttering like a bird, but gradually I got into the way of the thing and guided my
coracle among the waves, with only now and then a blow upon her bows and a dash of
foam in my face.
I was now gaining rapidly on the schooner; I could see the brass glisten on the tiller
as it banged about, and still no soul appeared upon her decks. I could not choose but
suppose she was deserted. If not, the men were lying drunk below, where I might batten
them down, perhaps, and do what I chose with the ship.
For some time she had been doing the worse thing possible for me—standing still.
She headed nearly due south, yawing, of course, all the time. Each time she fell off, her
sails partly filled, and these brought her in a moment right to the wind again. I have said
this was the worst thing possible for me, for helpless as she looked in this situation, with
the canvas cracking like cannon and the blocks trundling and banging on the deck, she
still continued to run away from me, not only with the speed of the current, but by the
whole amount of her leeway, which was naturally great.
But now, at last, I had my chance. The breeze fell for some seconds, very low, and the
current gradually turning her, the Hispaniola revolved slowly round her centre and at
last presented me her stern, with the cabin window still gaping open and the lamp over
the table still burning on into the day. The main-sail hung drooped like a banner. She
was stock-still but for the current.
For the last little while I had even lost, but now redoubling my efforts, I began once
more to overhaul the chase.
I was not a hundred yards from her when the wind came again in a clap; she filled on
the port tack and was off again, stooping and skimming like a swallow.
My first impulse was one of despair, but my second was towards joy. Round she came,
till she was broadside on to me—round still till she had covered a half and then two
thirds and then three quarters of the distance that separated us. I could see the waves
boiling white under her forefoot. Immensely tall she looked to me from my low station
in the coracle.

Treasure Island P a g e | 151

 And then, of a sudden, I began to comprehend. I had scarce time to think—scarce
time to act and save myself. I was on the summit of one swell when the schooner came
stooping over the next. The bowsprit was over my head. I sprang to my feet and leaped,
stamping the coracle under water. With one hand I caught the jib-boom, while my foot
was lodged between the stay and the brace; and as I still clung there panting, a dull
blow told me that the schooner had charged down upon and struck the coracle and that
I was left without retreat on the Hispaniola.

Treasure Island P a g e | 152

 I Strike the Jolly Roger
I HAD scarce gained a position on the bowsprit when the flying jib flapped and filled
upon the other tack, with a report like a gun. The schooner trembled to her keel under
the reverse, but next moment, the other sails still drawing, the jib flapped back again
and hung idle.
This had nearly tossed me off into the sea; and now I lost no time, crawled back along
the bowsprit, and tumbled head foremost on the deck.
I was on the lee side of the forecastle, and the mainsail, which was still drawing,
concealed from me a certain portion of the after-deck. Not a soul was to be seen. The
planks, which had not been swabbed since the mutiny, bore the print of many feet, and
an empty bottle, broken by the neck, tumbled to and fro like a live thing in the scuppers.
Suddenly the Hispaniola came right into the wind. The jibs behind me cracked aloud,
the rudder slammed to, the whole ship gave a sickening heave and shudder, and at the
same moment the main-boom swung inboard, the sheet groaning in the blocks, and
showed me the lee after-deck.
There were the two watchmen, sure enough: red-cap on his back, as stiff as a
handspike, with his arms stretched out like those of a crucifix and his teeth showing
through his open lips; Israel Hands propped against the bulwarks, his chin on his chest,

Treasure Island P a g e | 153

his hands lying open before him on the deck, his face as white, under its tan, as a tallow
candle.
For a while the ship kept bucking and sidling like a vicious horse, the sails filling, now
on one tack, now on another, and the boom swinging to and fro till the mast groaned
aloud under the strain. Now and again too there would come a cloud of light sprays
over the bulwark and a heavy blow of the ship’s bows against the swell; so much heavier
weather was made of it by this great rigged ship than by my home-made, lop-sided
coracle, now gone to the bottom of the sea.
At every jump of the schooner, red-cap slipped to and fro, but—what was ghastly to
behold—neither his attitude nor his fixed teeth-disclosing grin was anyway disturbed
by this rough usage. At every jump too, Hands appeared still more to sink into himself
and settle down upon the deck, his feet sliding ever the farther out, and the whole body
canting towards the stern, so that his face became, little by little, hid from me; and at
last I could see nothing beyond his ear and the frayed ringlet of one whisker.
At the same time, I observed, around both of them, splashes of dark blood upon the
planks and began to feel sure that they had killed each other in their drunken wrath.
While I was thus looking and wondering, in a calm moment, when the ship was still,
Israel Hands turned partly round and with a low moan writhed himself back to the
position in which I had seen him first. The moan, which told of pain and deadly
weakness, and the way in which his jaw hung open went right to my heart. But when I
remembered the talk I had overheard from the apple barrel, all pity left me.
I walked aft until I reached the main-mast.
“Come aboard, Mr. Hands,” I said ironically.
He rolled his eyes round heavily, but he was too far gone to express surprise. All he
could do was to utter one word, “Brandy.”
It occurred to me there was no time to lose, and dodging the boom as it once more
lurched across the deck, I slipped aft and down the companion stairs into the cabin.
It was such a scene of confusion as you can hardly fancy. All the lockfast places had
been broken open in quest of the chart. The floor was thick with mud where ruffians
had sat down to drink or consult after wading in the marshes round their camp. The
bulkheads, all painted in clear white and beaded round with gilt, bore a pattern of dirty
hands. Dozens of empty bottles clinked together in corners to the rolling of the ship.
One of the doctor’s medical books lay open on the table, half of the leaves gutted out,
I suppose, for pipelights. In the midst of all this the lamp still cast a smoky glow, obscure
and brown as umber.

Treasure Island P a g e | 154

 I went into the cellar; all the barrels were gone, and of the bottles a most surprising
number had been drunk out and thrown away. Certainly, since the mutiny began, not a
man of them could ever have been sober.
Foraging about, I found a bottle with some brandy left, for Hands; and for myself I
routed out some biscuit, some pickled fruits, a great bunch of raisins, and a piece of
cheese. With these I came on deck, put down my own stock behind the rudder head
and well out of the coxswain’s reach, went forward to the water-breaker, and had a
good deep drink of water, and then, and not till then, gave Hands the brandy.
He must have drunk a gill before he took the bottle from his mouth.
“Aye,” said he, “by thunder, but I wanted some o’ that!”
I had sat down already in my own corner and begun to eat.
“Much hurt?” I asked him.
He grunted, or rather, I might say, he barked.
“If that doctor was aboard,” he said, “I’d be right enough in a couple of turns, but I
don’t have no manner of luck, you see, and that’s what’s the matter with me. As for
that swab, he’s good and dead, he is,” he added, indicating the man with the red cap.
“He warn’t no seaman anyhow. And where mought you have come from?”
“Well,” said I, “I’ve come aboard to take possession of this ship, Mr. Hands; and you’ll
please regard me as your captain until further notice.”
He looked at me sourly enough but said nothing. Some of the colour had come back
into his cheeks, though he still looked very sick and still continued to slip out and settle
down as the ship banged about.
“By the by,” I continued, “I can’t have these colours, Mr. Hands; and by your leave,
I’ll strike ’em. Better none than these.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 155

Treasure Island P a g e | 156
 And again dodging the boom, I ran to the colour lines, handed down their cursed
black flag, and chucked it overboard.
“God save the king!” said I, waving my cap. “And there’s an end to Captain Silver!”
He watched me keenly and slyly, his chin all the while on his breast.
“I reckon,” he said at last, “I reckon, Cap’n Hawkins, you’ll kind of want to get ashore
now. S’pose we talks.”
“Why, yes,” says I, “with all my heart, Mr. Hands. Say on.” And I went back to my meal
with a good appetite.
“This man,” he began, nodding feebly at the corpse “—O’Brien were his name, a rank
Irelander—this man and me got the canvas on her, meaning for to sail her back.
Well, he’s dead now, he is—as dead as bilge; and who’s to sail this ship, I don’t see.
Without I gives you a hint, you ain’t that man, as far’s I can tell. Now, look here, you
gives me food and drink and a old scarf or ankecher to tie my wound up, you do, and I’ll
tell you how to sail her, and that’s about square all round, I take it.”
“I’ll tell you one thing,” says I: “I’m not going back to Captain Kidd’s anchorage. I mean
to get into North Inlet and beach her quietly there.”
“To be sure you did,” he cried. “Why, I ain’t sich an infernal lubber after all. I can see,
can’t I? I’ve tried my fling, I have, and I’ve lost, and it’s you has the wind of me. North
Inlet? Why, I haven’t no ch’ice, not I! I’d help you sail her up to Execution Dock, by
thunder! So I would.”
Well, as it seemed to me, there was some sense in this. We struck our bargain on the
spot. In three minutes I had the Hispaniola sailing easily before the wind along the coast
of Treasure Island, with good hopes of turning the northern point ere noon and beating
down again as far as North Inlet before high water, when we might beach her safely
and wait till the subsiding tide permitted us to land.
Then I lashed the tiller and went below to my own chest, where I got a soft silk
handkerchief of my mother’s. With this, and with my aid, Hands bound up the great
bleeding stab he had received in the thigh, and after he had eaten a little and had a
swallow or two more of the brandy, he began to pick up visibly, sat straighter up, spoke
louder and clearer, and looked in every way another man.
The breeze served us admirably. We skimmed before it like a bird, the coast of the
island flashing by and the view changing every minute. Soon we were past the high
lands and bowling beside low, sandy country, sparsely dotted with dwarf pines, and
soon we were beyond that again and had turned the corner of the rocky hill that ends
the island on the north.

Treasure Island P a g e | 157

 I was greatly elated with my new command, and pleased with the bright, sunshiny
weather and these different prospects of the coast. I had now plenty of water and good
things to eat, and my conscience, which had smitten me hard for my desertion, was
quieted by the great conquest I had made. I should, I think, have had nothing left me to
desire but for the eyes of the coxswain as they followed me derisively about the deck
and the odd smile that appeared continually on his face. It was a smile that had in it
something both of pain and weakness—a haggard old man’s smile; but there was,
besides that, a grain of derision, a shadow of treachery, in his expression as he craftily
watched, and watched, and watched me at my work.

Treasure Island P a g e | 158

 Israel Hands
THE wind, serving us to a desire, now hauled into the west. We could run so much
the easier from the north-east corner of the island to the mouth of the North Inlet. Only,
as we had no power to anchor and dared not beach her till the tide had flowed a good
deal farther, time hung on our hands. The coxswain told me how to lay the ship to; after
a good many trials I succeeded, and we both sat in silence over another meal.
“Cap’n,” said he at length with that same uncomfortable smile, “here’s my old
shipmate, O’Brien; s’pose you was to heave him overboard. I ain’t partic’lar as a rule,
and I don’t take no blame for settling his hash, but I don’t reckon him ornamental now,
do you?”
“I’m not strong enough, and I don’t like the job; and there he lies, for me,” said I.
“This here’s an unlucky ship, this Hispaniola, Jim,” he went on, blinking. “There’s a
power of men been killed in this Hispaniola—a sight o’ poor seamen dead and gone
since you and me took ship to Bristol. I never seen sich dirty luck, not I. There was this
here O’Brien now—he’s dead, ain’t he? Well now, I’m no scholar, and you’re a lad as
can read and figure, and to put it straight, do you take it as a dead man is dead for good,
or do he come alive again?”

Treasure Island P a g e | 159

 “You can kill the body, Mr. Hands, but not the spirit; you must know that already,” I
replied. “O’Brien there is in another world, and may be watching us.”
“Ah!” says he. “Well, that’s unfort’nate—appears as if killing parties was a waste of
time. Howsomever, sperrits don’t reckon for much, by what I’ve seen. I’ll chance it with
the sperrits, Jim. And now, you’ve spoke up free, and I’ll take it kind if you’d step down
into that there cabin and get me a—well, a—shiver my timbers! I can’t hit the name on
’t; well, you get me a bottle of wine, Jim—this here brandy’s too strong for my head.”
Now, the coxswain’s hesitation seemed to be unnatural, and as for the notion of his
preferring wine to brandy, I entirely disbelieved it. The whole story was a pretext. He
wanted me to leave the deck—so much was plain; but with what purpose I could in no
way imagine. His eyes never met mine; they kept wandering to and fro, up and down,
now with a look to the sky, now with a flitting glance upon the dead O’Brien. All the
time he kept smiling and putting his tongue out in the most guilty, embarrassed
manner, so that a child could have told that he was bent on some deception. I was
prompt with my answer, however, for I saw where my advantage lay and that with a
fellow so densely stupid I could easily conceal my suspicions to the end.
“Some wine?” I said. “Far better. Will you have white or red?”
“Well, I reckon it’s about the blessed same to me, shipmate,” he replied; “so it’s
strong, and plenty of it, what’s the odds?”
“All right,” I answered. “I’ll bring you port, Mr. Hands. But I’ll have to dig for it.”
With that I scuttled down the companion with all the noise I could, slipped off my
shoes, ran quietly along the sparred gallery, mounted the forecastle ladder, and popped
my head out of the fore companion. I knew he would not expect to see me there, yet I
took every precaution possible, and certainly the worst of my suspicions proved too
true.
He had risen from his position to his hands and knees, and though his leg obviously
hurt him pretty sharply when he moved—for I could hear him stifle a groan—yet it was
at a good, rattling rate that he trailed himself across the deck. In half a minute he had
reached the port scuppers and picked, out of a coil of rope, a long knife, or rather a
short dirk, discoloured to the hilt with blood. He looked upon it for a moment, thrusting
forth his under jaw, tried the point upon his hand, and then, hastily concealing it in the
bosom of his jacket, trundled back again into his old place against the bulwark.
This was all that I required to know. Israel could move about, he was now armed, and
if he had been at so much trouble to get rid of me, it was plain that I was meant to be
the victim. What he would do afterwards—whether he would try to crawl right across
the island from North Inlet to the camp among the swamps or whether he would fire

Treasure Island P a g e | 160

Long Tom, trusting that his own comrades might come first to help him—was, of course,
more than I could say.
Yet I felt sure that I could trust him in one point, since in that our interests jumped
together, and that was in the disposition of the schooner. We both desired to have her
stranded safe enough, in a sheltered place, and so that, when the time came, she could
be got off again with as little labour and danger as might be; and until that was done I
considered that my life would certainly be spared.
While I was thus turning the business over in my mind, I had not been idle with my
body. I had stolen back to the cabin, slipped once more into my shoes, and laid my hand
at random on a bottle of wine, and now, with this for an excuse, I made my
reappearance on the deck.
Hands lay as I had left him, all fallen together in a bundle and with his eyelids lowered
as though he were too weak to bear the light. He looked up, however, at my coming,
knocked the neck off the bottle like a man who had done the same thing often, and
took a good swig, with his favourite toast of “Here’s luck!” Then he lay quiet for a little,
and then, pulling out a stick of tobacco, begged me to cut him a quid.
“Cut me a junk o’ that,” says he, “for I haven’t no knife and hardly strength enough,
so be as I had. Ah, Jim, Jim, I reckon I’ve missed stays! Cut me a quid, as’ll likely be the
last, lad, for I’m for my long home, and no mistake.”
“Well,” said I, “I’ll cut you some tobacco, but if I was you and thought myself so badly,
I would go to my prayers like a Christian man.”
“Why?” said he. “Now, you tell me why.”
“Why?” I cried. “You were asking me just now about the dead. You’ve broken your
trust; you’ve lived in sin and lies and blood; there’s a man you killed lying at your feet
this moment, and you ask me why! For God’s mercy, Mr. Hands, that’s why.”
I spoke with a little heat, thinking of the bloody dirk he had hidden in his pocket and
designed, in his ill thoughts, to end me with. He, for his part, took a great draught of the
wine and spoke with the most unusual solemnity.
“For thirty years,” he said, “I’ve sailed the seas and seen good and bad, better and
worse, fair weather and foul, provisions running out, knives going, and what not. Well,
now I tell you, I never seen good come o’ goodness yet. Him as strikes first is my fancy;
dead men don’t bite; them’s my views—amen, so be it. And now, you look here,” he
added, suddenly changing his tone, “we’ve had about enough of this foolery. The tide’s
made good enough by now. You just take my orders, Cap’n Hawkins, and we’ll sail slap
in and be done with it.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 161

 All told, we had scarce two miles to run; but the navigation was delicate, the entrance
to this northern anchorage was not only narrow and shoal, but lay east and west, so
that the schooner must be nicely handled to be got in. I think I was a good, prompt
subaltern, and I am very sure that Hands was an excellent pilot, for we went about and
about and dodged in, shaving the banks, with a certainty and a neatness that were a
pleasure to behold.
Scarcely had we passed the heads before the land closed around us. The shores of
North Inlet were as thickly wooded as those of the southern anchorage, but the space
was longer and narrower and more like, what in truth it was, the estuary of a river. Right
before us, at the southern end, we saw the wreck of a ship in the last stages of
dilapidation. It had been a great vessel of three masts but had lain so long exposed to
the injuries of the weather that it was hung about with great webs of dripping seaweed,
and on the deck of it shore bushes had taken root and now flourished thick with flowers.
It was a sad sight, but it showed us that the anchorage was calm.
“Now,” said Hands, “look there; there’s a pet bit for to beach a ship in. Fine flat sand,
never a cat’s paw, trees all around of it, and flowers a-blowing like a garding on that old
ship.”
“And once beached,” I inquired, “how shall we get her off again?”
“Why, so,” he replied: “you take a line ashore there on the other side at low water,
take a turn about one of them big pines; bring it back, take a turn around the capstan,
and lie to for the tide. Come high water, all hands take a pull upon the line, and off she
comes as sweet as natur’. And now, boy, you stand by. We’re near the bit now, and
she’s too much way on her. Starboard a little—so—steady—starboard—larboard a
little—steady—steady!”
So he issued his commands, which I breathlessly obeyed, till, all of a sudden, he cried,
“Now, my hearty, luff!” And I put the helm hard up, and the Hispaniola swung round
rapidly and ran stem on for the low, wooded shore.
The excitement of these last manoeuvres had somewhat interfered with the watch I
had kept hitherto, sharply enough, upon the coxswain. Even then I was still so much
interested, waiting for the ship to touch, that I had quite forgot the peril that hung over
my head and stood craning over the starboard bulwarks and watching the ripples
spreading wide before the bows. I might have fallen without a struggle for my life had
not a sudden disquietude seized upon me and made me turn my head. Perhaps I had
heard a creak or seen his shadow moving with the tail of my eye; perhaps it was an
instinct like a cat’s; but, sure enough, when I looked round, there was Hands, already
half-way towards me, with the dirk in his right hand.

Treasure Island P a g e | 162

 We must both have cried out aloud when our eyes met, but while mine was the shrill
cry of terror, his was a roar of fury like a charging bully’s. At the same instant, he threw
himself forward and I leapt sideways towards the bows. As I did so, I let go of the tiller,
which sprang sharp to leeward, and I think this saved my life, for it struck Hands across
the chest and stopped him, for the moment, dead.
Before he could recover, I was safe out of the corner where he had me trapped, with
all the deck to dodge about. Just forward of the main-mast I stopped, drew a pistol from
my pocket, took a cool aim, though he had already turned and was once more coming
directly after me, and drew the trigger. The hammer fell, but there followed neither
flash nor sound; the priming was useless with sea-water. I cursed myself for my neglect.
Why had not I, long before, reprimed and reloaded my only weapons? Then I should
not have been as now, a mere fleeing sheep before this butcher.
Wounded as he was, it was wonderful how fast he could move, his grizzled hair
tumbling over his face, and his face itself as red as a red ensign with his haste and fury.
I had no time to try my other pistol, nor indeed much inclination, for I was sure it would
be useless. One thing I saw plainly: I must not simply retreat before him, or he would
speedily hold me boxed into the bows, as a moment since he had so nearly boxed me
in the stern. Once so caught, and nine or ten inches of the blood-stained dirk would be
my last experience on this side of eternity. I placed my palms against the main-mast,
which was of a goodish bigness, and waited, every nerve upon the stretch.
Seeing that I meant to dodge, he also paused; and a moment or two passed in feints
on his part and corresponding movements upon mine. It was such a game as I had often
played at home about the rocks of Black Hill Cove, but never before, you may be sure,
with such a wildly beating heart as now. Still, as I say, it was a boy’s game, and I thought
I could hold my own at it against an elderly seaman with a wounded thigh. Indeed my
courage had begun to rise so high that I allowed myself a few darting thoughts on what
would be the end of the affair, and while I saw certainly that I could spin it out for long,
I saw no hope of any ultimate escape.
Well, while things stood thus, suddenly the Hispaniola struck, staggered, ground for
an instant in the sand, and then, swift as a blow, canted over to the port side till the
deck stood at an angle of forty-five degrees and about a puncheon of water splashed
into the scupper holes and lay, in a pool, between the deck and bulwark.
We were both of us capsized in a second, and both of us rolled, almost together, into
the scuppers, the dead red-cap, with his arms still spread out, tumbling stiffly after us.
So near were we, indeed, that my head came against the coxswain’s foot with a crack
that made my teeth rattle. Blow and all, I was the first afoot again, for Hands had got
involved with the dead body. The sudden canting of the ship had made the deck no

Treasure Island P a g e | 163

place for running on; I had to find some new way of escape, and that upon the instant,
for my foe was almost touching me. Quick as thought, I sprang into the mizzen shrouds,
rattled up hand over hand, and did not draw a breath till I was seated on the cross-
trees.
I had been saved by being prompt; the dirk had struck not half a foot below me as I
pursued my upward flight; and there stood Israel Hands with his mouth open and his
face upturned to mine, a perfect statue of surprise and disappointment.
Now that I had a moment to myself, I lost no time in changing the priming of my
pistol, and then, having one ready for service, and to make assurance doubly sure, I
proceeded to draw the load of the other and recharge it afresh from the beginning.
My new employment struck Hands all of a heap; he began to see the dice going
against him, and after an obvious hesitation, he also hauled himself heavily into the
shrouds, and with the dirk in his teeth, began slowly and painfully to mount. It cost him
no end of time and groans to haul his wounded leg behind him, and I had quietly
finished my arrangements before he was much more than a third of the way up. Then,
with a pistol in either hand, I addressed him.
“One more step, Mr. Hands,” said I, “and I’ll blow your brains out! Dead men don’t
bite, you know,” I added with a chuckle.
He stopped instantly. I could see by the working of his face that he was trying to think,
and the process was so slow and laborious that, in my new-found security, I laughed
aloud. At last, with a swallow or two, he spoke, his face still wearing the same
expression of extreme perplexity. In order to speak he had to take the dagger from his
mouth, but in all else he remained unmoved.
“Jim,” says he, “I reckon we’re fouled, you and me, and we’ll have to sign articles. I’d
have had you but for that there lurch, but I don’t have no luck, not I; and I reckon I’ll
have to strike, which comes hard, you see, for a master mariner to a ship’s younker like
you, Jim.”
I was drinking in his words and smiling away, as conceited as a cock upon a wall, when,
all in a breath, back went his right hand over his shoulder. Something sang like an arrow
through the air; I felt a blow and then a sharp pang, and there I was pinned by the
shoulder to the mast. In the horrid pain and surprise of the moment—I scarce can say
it was by my own volition, and I am sure it was without a conscious aim—both my pistols
went off, and both escaped out of my hands. They did not fall alone; with a choked cry,
the coxswain loosed his grasp upon the shrouds and plunged head first into the water.

Treasure Island P a g e | 164

Treasure Island P a g e | 165
 “Pieces of Eight”
OWING to the cant of the vessel, the masts hung far out over the water, and from my
perch on the cross-trees I had nothing below me but the surface of the bay. Hands, who
was not so far up, was in consequence nearer to the ship and fell between me and the
bulwarks. He rose once to the surface in a lather of foam and blood and then sank again
for good. As the water settled, I could see him lying huddled together on the clean,
bright sand in the shadow of the vessel’s sides. A fish or two whipped past his body.
Sometimes, by the quivering of the water, he appeared to move a little, as if he were
trying to rise. But he was dead enough, for all that, being both shot and drowned, and
was food for fish in the very place where he had designed my slaughter.
I was no sooner certain of this than I began to feel sick, faint, and terrified. The hot
blood was running over my back and chest. The dirk, where it had pinned my shoulder
to the mast, seemed to burn like a hot iron; yet it was not so much these real sufferings
that distressed me, for these, it seemed to me, I could bear without a murmur; it was
the horror I had upon my mind of falling from the cross-trees into that still green water,
beside the body of the coxswain.

Treasure Island P a g e | 166

 I clung with both hands till my nails ached, and I shut my eyes as if to cover up the
peril. Gradually my mind came back again, my pulses quieted down to a more natural
time, and I was once more in possession of myself.
It was my first thought to pluck forth the dirk, but either it stuck too hard or my nerve
failed me, and I desisted with a violent shudder. Oddly enough, that very shudder did
the business. The knife, in fact, had come the nearest in the world to missing me
altogether; it held me by a mere pinch of skin, and this the shudder tore away. The
blood ran down the faster, to be sure, but I was my own master again and only tacked
to the mast by my coat and shirt.
These last I broke through with a sudden jerk, and then regained the deck by the
starboard shrouds. For nothing in the world would I have again ventured, shaken as I
was, upon the overhanging port shrouds from which Israel had so lately fallen.
I went below and did what I could for my wound; it pained me a good deal and still
bled freely, but it was neither deep nor dangerous, nor did it greatly gall me when I used
my arm. Then I looked around me, and as the ship was now, in a sense, my own, I began
to think of clearing it from its last passenger—the dead man, O’Brien.
He had pitched, as I have said, against the bulwarks, where he lay like some horrible,
ungainly sort of puppet, life-size, indeed, but how different from life’s colour or life’s
comeliness! In that position I could easily have my way with him, and as the habit of
tragical adventures had worn off almost all my terror for the dead, I took him by the
waist as if he had been a sack of bran and with one good heave, tumbled him overboard.
He went in with a sounding plunge; the red cap came off and remained floating on the
surface; and as soon as the splash subsided, I could see him and Israel lying side by side,
both wavering with the tremulous movement of the water. O’Brien, though still quite a
young man, was very bald. There he lay, with that bald head across the knees of the
man who had killed him and the quick fishes steering to and fro over both.
I was now alone upon the ship; the tide had just turned. The sun was within so few
degrees of setting that already the shadow of the pines upon the western shore began
to reach right across the anchorage and fall in patterns on the deck. The evening breeze
had sprung up, and though it was well warded off by the hill with the two peaks upon
the east, the cordage had begun to sing a little softly to itself and the idle sails to rattle
to and fro.
I began to see a danger to the ship. The jibs I speedily doused and brought tumbling
to the deck, but the main-sail was a harder matter. Of course, when the schooner
canted over, the boom had swung out-board, and the cap of it and a foot or two of sail
hung even under water. I thought this made it still more dangerous; yet the strain was
so heavy that I half feared to meddle. At last I got my knife and cut the halyards. The

Treasure Island P a g e | 167

peak dropped instantly, a great belly of loose canvas floated broad upon the water, and
since, pull as I liked, I could not budge the downhall, that was the extent of what I could
accomplish. For the rest, the Hispaniola must trust to luck, like myself.
By this time the whole anchorage had fallen into shadow—the last rays, I remember,
falling through a glade of the wood and shining bright as jewels on the flowery mantle
of the wreck. It began to be chill; the tide was rapidly fleeting seaward, the schooner
settling more and more on her beam-ends.
I scrambled forward and looked over. It seemed shallow enough, and holding the cut
hawser in both hands for a last security, I let myself drop softly overboard. The water
scarcely reached my waist; the sand was firm and covered with ripple marks, and I
waded ashore in great spirits, leaving the Hispaniola on her side, with her main-sail
trailing wide upon the surface of the bay. About the same time, the sun went fairly
down and the breeze whistled low in the dusk among the tossing pines.
At least, and at last, I was off the sea, nor had I returned thence empty-handed. There
lay the schooner, clear at last from buccaneers and ready for our own men to board
and get to sea again. I had nothing nearer my fancy than to get home to the stockade
and boast of my achievements. Possibly I might be blamed a bit for my truantry, but the
recapture of the Hispaniola was a clenching answer, and I hoped that even Captain
Smollett would confess I had not lost my time.
So thinking, and in famous spirits, I began to set my face homeward for the block
house and my companions. I remembered that the most easterly of the rivers which
drain into Captain Kidd’s anchorage ran from the two-peaked hill upon my left, and I
bent my course in that direction that I might pass the stream while it was small. The
wood was pretty open, and keeping along the lower spurs, I had soon turned the corner
of that hill, and not long after waded to the mid-calf across the watercourse.
This brought me near to where I had encountered Ben Gunn, the maroon; and I
walked more circumspectly, keeping an eye on every side. The dusk had come nigh hand
completely, and as I opened out the cleft between the two peaks, I became aware of a
wavering glow against the sky, where, as I judged, the man of the island was cooking
his supper before a roaring fire. And yet I wondered, in my heart, that he should show
himself so careless. For if I could see this radiance, might it not reach the eyes of Silver
himself where he camped upon the shore among the marshes?
Gradually the night fell blacker; it was all I could do to guide myself even roughly
towards my destination; the double hill behind me and the Spy-glass on my right hand
loomed faint and fainter; the stars were few and pale; and in the low ground where I
wandered I kept tripping among bushes and rolling into sandy pits.

Treasure Island P a g e | 168

 Suddenly a kind of brightness fell about me. I looked up; a pale glimmer of
moonbeams had alighted on the summit of the Spy-glass, and soon after I saw
something broad and silvery moving low down behind the trees, and knew the moon
had risen.
With this to help me, I passed rapidly over what remained to me of my journey, and
sometimes walking, sometimes running, impatiently drew near to the stockade. Yet, as
I began to thread the grove that lies before it, I was not so thoughtless but that I slacked
my pace and went a trifle warily. It would have been a poor end of my adventures to
get shot down by my own party in mistake.
The moon was climbing higher and higher, its light began to fall here and there in
masses through the more open districts of the wood, and right in front of me a glow of
a different colour appeared among the trees. It was red and hot, and now and again it
was a little darkened—as it were, the embers of a bonfire smouldering.
For the life of me I could not think what it might be.
At last I came right down upon the borders of the clearing. The western end was
already steeped in moonshine; the rest, and the block house itself, still lay in a black
shadow chequered with long silvery streaks of light. On the other side of the house an
immense fire had burned itself into clear embers and shed a steady, red reverberation,
contrasted strongly with the mellow paleness of the moon. There was not a soul stirring
nor a sound beside the noises of the breeze.
I stopped, with much wonder in my heart, and perhaps a little terror also. It had not
been our way to build great fires; we were, indeed, by the captain’s orders, somewhat
niggardly of firewood, and I began to fear that something had gone wrong while I was
absent.
I stole round by the eastern end, keeping close in shadow, and at a convenient place,
where the darkness was thickest, crossed the palisade.
To make assurance surer, I got upon my hands and knees and crawled, without a
sound, towards the corner of the house. As I drew nearer, my heart was suddenly and
greatly lightened. It is not a pleasant noise in itself, and I have often complained of it at
other times, but just then it was like music to hear my friends snoring together so loud
and peaceful in their sleep. The sea-cry of the watch, that beautiful “All’s well,” never
fell more reassuringly on my ear.
In the meantime, there was no doubt of one thing; they kept an infamous bad watch.
If it had been Silver and his lads that were now creeping in on them, not a soul would
have seen daybreak. That was what it was, thought I, to have the captain wounded; and

Treasure Island P a g e | 169

again I blamed myself sharply for leaving them in that danger with so few to mount
guard.
By this time I had got to the door and stood up. All was dark within, so that I could
distinguish nothing by the eye. As for sounds, there was the steady drone of the snorers
and a small occasional noise, a flickering or pecking that I could in no way account for.
With my arms before me I walked steadily in. I should lie down in my own place (I
thought with a silent chuckle) and enjoy their faces when they found me in the morning.

Treasure Island P a g e | 170

Treasure Island P a g e | 171
 My foot struck something yielding—it was a sleeper’s leg; and he turned and groaned,
but without awaking.
And then, all of a sudden, a shrill voice broke forth out of the darkness:
“Pieces of eight! Pieces of eight! Pieces of eight! Pieces of eight! Pieces of eight!” and
so forth, without pause or change, like the clacking of a tiny mill.
Silver’s green parrot, Captain Flint! It was she whom I had heard pecking at a piece of
bark; it was she, keeping better watch than any human being, who thus announced my
arrival with her wearisome refrain.
I had no time left me to recover. At the sharp, clipping tone of the parrot, the sleepers
awoke and sprang up; and with a mighty oath, the voice of Silver cried, “Who goes?”
I turned to run, struck violently against one person, recoiled, and ran full into the
arms of a second, who for his part closed upon and held me tight.
“Bring a torch, Dick,” said Silver when my capture was thus assured.
And one of the men left the log-house and presently returned with a lighted brand.

Treasure Island P a g e | 172

 PART SIX — CAPTAIN SILVER

In the Enemy’s Camp

THE red glare of the torch, lighting up the interior of the block house, showed me the
worst of my apprehensions realized. The pirates were in possession of the house and
stores: there was the cask of cognac, there were the pork and bread, as before, and
what tenfold increased my horror, not a sign of any prisoner. I could only judge that all
had perished, and my heart smote me sorely that I had not been there to perish with
them.
There were six of the buccaneers, all told; not another man was left alive. Five of
them were on their feet, flushed and swollen, suddenly called out of the first sleep of
drunkenness. The sixth had only risen upon his elbow; he was deadly pale, and the
blood-stained bandage round his head told that he had recently been wounded, and
still more recently dressed. I remembered the man who had been shot and had run
back among the woods in the great attack, and doubted not that this was he.
The parrot sat, preening her plumage, on Long John’s shoulder. He himself, I thought,
looked somewhat paler and more stern than I was used to. He still wore the fine

Treasure Island P a g e | 173

broadcloth suit in which he had fulfilled his mission, but it was bitterly the worse for
wear, daubed with clay and torn with the sharp briers of the wood.
“So,” said he, “here’s Jim Hawkins, shiver my timbers! Dropped in, like, eh? Well,
come, I take that friendly.”
And thereupon he sat down across the brandy cask and began to fill a pipe.
“Give me a loan of the link, Dick,” said he; and then, when he had a good light, “That’ll
do, lad,” he added; “stick the glim in the wood heap; and you, gentlemen, bring
yourselves to! You needn’t stand up for Mr. Hawkins; he’ll excuse you, you may lay to
that. And so, Jim”—stopping the tobacco—“here you were, and quite a pleasant
surprise for poor old John. I see you were smart when first I set my eyes on you, but this
here gets away from me clean, it do.”
To all this, as may be well supposed, I made no answer. They had set me with my back
against the wall, and I stood there, looking Silver in the face, pluckily enough, I hope, to
all outward appearance, but with black despair in my heart.
Silver took a whiff or two of his pipe with great composure and then ran on again.
“Now, you see, Jim, so be as you are here,” says he, “I’ll give you a piece of my mind.
I’ve always liked you, I have, for a lad of spirit, and the picter of my own self when I was
young and handsome. I always wanted you to jine and take your share, and die a
gentleman, and now, my cock, you’ve got to. Cap’n Smollett’s a fine seaman, as I’ll own
up to any day, but stiff on discipline. ‘Dooty is dooty,’ says he, and right he is. Just you
keep clear of the cap’n. The doctor himself is gone dead again you—‘ungrateful scamp’
was what he said; and the short and the long of the whole story is about here: you can’t
go back to your own lot, for they won’t have you; and without you start a third ship’s
company all by yourself, which might be lonely, you’ll have to jine with Cap’n Silver.”
So far so good. My friends, then, were still alive, and though I partly believed the truth
of Silver’s statement, that the cabin party were incensed at me for my desertion, I was
more relieved than distressed by what I heard.
“I don’t say nothing as to your being in our hands,” continued Silver, “though there
you are, and you may lay to it. I’m all for argyment; I never seen good come out o’
threatening. If you like the service, well, you’ll jine; and if you don’t, Jim, why, you’re
free to answer no—free and welcome, shipmate; and if fairer can be said by mortal
seaman, shiver my sides!”
“Am I to answer, then?” I asked with a very tremulous voice. Through all this sneering
talk, I was made to feel the threat of death that overhung me, and my cheeks burned
and my heart beat painfully in my breast.

Treasure Island P a g e | 174

 “Lad,” said Silver, “no one’s a-pressing of you. Take your bearings. None of us won’t
hurry you, mate; time goes so pleasant in your company, you see.”
“Well,” says I, growing a bit bolder, “if I’m to choose, I declare I have a right to know
what’s what, and why you’re here, and where my friends are.”
“Wot’s wot?” repeated one of the buccaneers in a deep growl. “Ah, he’d be a lucky
one as knowed that!”
“You’ll perhaps batten down your hatches till you’re spoke to, my friend,” cried Silver
truculently to this speaker. And then, in his first gracious tones, he replied to me,
“Yesterday morning, Mr. Hawkins,” said he, “in the dog-watch, down came Doctor
Livesey with a flag of truce. Says he, ‘Cap’n Silver, you’re sold out. Ship’s gone.’ Well,
maybe we’d been taking a glass, and a song to help it round. I won’t say no. Leastways,
none of us had looked out. We looked out, and by thunder, the old ship was gone! I
never seen a pack o’ fools look fishier; and you may lay to that, if I tells you that looked
the fishiest. ‘Well,’ says the doctor, ‘let’s bargain.’ We bargained, him and I, and here
we are: stores, brandy, block house, the firewood you was thoughtful enough to cut,
and in a manner of speaking, the whole blessed boat, from cross-trees to kelson. As for
them, they’ve tramped; I don’t know where’s they are.”
He drew again quietly at his pipe.
“And lest you should take it into that head of yours,” he went on, “that you was
included in the treaty, here’s the last word that was said: ‘How many are you,’ says I,
‘to leave?’ ‘Four,’ says he; ‘four, and one of us wounded. As for that boy, I don’t know
where he is, confound him,’ says he, ‘nor I don’t much care. We’re about sick of him.’
These was his words.
“Is that all?” I asked.
“Well, it’s all that you’re to hear, my son,” returned Silver.
“And now I am to choose?”
“And now you are to choose, and you may lay to that,” said Silver.
“Well,” said I, “I am not such a fool but I know pretty well what I have to look for. Let
the worst come to the worst, it’s little I care. I’ve seen too many die since I fell in with
you. But there’s a thing or two I have to tell you,” I said, and by this time I was quite
excited; “and the first is this: here you are, in a bad way—ship lost, treasure lost, men
lost, your whole business gone to wreck; and if you want to know who did it—it was I!
I was in the apple barrel the night we sighted land, and I heard you, John, and you, Dick
Johnson, and Hands, who is now at the bottom of the sea, and told every word you said
before the hour was out. And as for the schooner, it was I who cut her cable, and it was
I that killed the men you had aboard of her, and it was I who brought her where you’ll

Treasure Island P a g e | 175

never see her more, not one of you. The laugh’s on my side; I’ve had the top of this
business from the first; I no more fear you than I fear a fly. Kill me, if you please, or
spare me. But one thing I’ll say, and no more; if you spare me, bygones are bygones,
and when you fellows are in court for piracy, I’ll save you all I can. It is for you to choose.
Kill another and do yourselves no good, or spare me and keep a witness to save you
from the gallows.”
I stopped, for, I tell you, I was out of breath, and to my wonder, not a man of them
moved, but all sat staring at me like as many sheep. And while they were still staring, I
broke out again, “And now, Mr. Silver,” I said, “I believe you’re the best man here, and
if things go to the worst, I’ll take it kind of you to let the doctor know the way I took it.”
“I’ll bear it in mind,” said Silver with an accent so curious that I could not, for the life
of me, decide whether he were laughing at my request or had been favourably affected
by my courage.
“I’ll put one to that,” cried the old mahogany-faced seaman—Morgan by name—
whom I had seen in Long John’s public-house upon the quays of Bristol. “It was him that
knowed Black Dog.”
“Well, and see here,” added the sea-cook. “I’ll put another again to that, by thunder!
For it was this same boy that faked the chart from Billy Bones. First and last, we’ve split
upon Jim Hawkins!”
“Then here goes!” said Morgan with an oath.
And he sprang up, drawing his knife as if he had been twenty.
“Avast, there!” cried Silver. “Who are you, Tom Morgan? Maybe you thought you was
cap’n here, perhaps. By the powers, but I’ll teach you better! Cross me, and you’ll go
where many a good man’s gone before you, first and last, these thirty year back—some
to the yard-arm, shiver my timbers, and some by the board, and all to feed the fishes.
There’s never a man looked me between the eyes and seen a good day a’terwards, Tom
Morgan, you may lay to that.”
Morgan paused, but a hoarse murmur rose from the others.
“Tom’s right,” said one.
“I stood hazing long enough from one,” added another. “I’ll be hanged if I’ll be hazed
by you, John Silver.”
“Did any of you gentlemen want to have it out with me?” roared Silver, bending far
forward from his position on the keg, with his pipe still glowing in his right hand. “Put a
name on what you’re at; you ain’t dumb, I reckon. Him that wants shall get it. Have I
lived this many years, and a son of a rum puncheon cock his hat athwart my hawse at
the latter end of it? You know the way; you’re all gentlemen o’ fortune, by your account.

Treasure Island P a g e | 176

Well, I’m ready. Take a cutlass, him that dares, and I’ll see the colour of his inside, crutch
and all, before that pipe’s empty.”

Not a man stirred; not a man answered.

“That’s your sort, is it?” he added, returning his pipe to his mouth. “Well, you’re a gay
lot to look at, anyway. Not much worth to fight, you ain’t. P’r’aps you can understand
King George’s English. I’m cap’n here by ’lection. I’m cap’n here because I’m the best
man by a long sea-mile. You won’t fight, as gentlemen o’ fortune should; then, by
thunder, you’ll obey, and you may lay to it! I like that boy, now; I never seen a better
boy than that. He’s more a man than any pair of rats of you in this here house, and what
I say is this: let me see him that’ll lay a hand on him—that’s what I say, and you may lay
to it.”
There was a long pause after this. I stood straight up against the wall, my heart still
going like a sledge-hammer, but with a ray of hope now shining in my bosom. Silver
leant back against the wall, his arms crossed, his pipe in the corner of his mouth, as calm
as though he had been in church; yet his eye kept wandering furtively, and he kept the
tail of it on his unruly followers. They, on their part, drew gradually together towards
the far end of the block house, and the low hiss of their whispering sounded in my ear

Treasure Island P a g e | 177

continuously, like a stream. One after another, they would look up, and the red light of
the torch would fall for a second on their nervous faces; but it was not towards me, it
was towards Silver that they turned their eyes.
“You seem to have a lot to say,” remarked Silver, spitting far into the air. “Pipe up and
let me hear it, or lay to.”
“Ax your pardon, sir,” returned one of the men; “you’re pretty free with some of the
rules; maybe you’ll kindly keep an eye upon the rest. This crew’s dissatisfied; this crew
don’t vally bullying a marlin-spike; this crew has its rights like other crews, I’ll make so
free as that; and by your own rules, I take it we can talk together. I ax your pardon, sir,
acknowledging you for to be captaing at this present; but I claim my right, and steps
outside for a council.”
And with an elaborate sea-salute, this fellow, a long, ill-looking, yellow-eyed man of
five and thirty, stepped coolly towards the door and disappeared out of the house. One
after another the rest followed his example, each making a salute as he passed, each
adding some apology. “According to rules,” said one. “Forecastle council,” said Morgan.
And so with one remark or another all marched out and left Silver and me alone with
the torch.
The sea-cook instantly removed his pipe.
“Now, look you here, Jim Hawkins,” he said in a steady whisper that was no more
than audible, “you’re within half a plank of death, and what’s a long sight worse, of
torture. They’re going to throw me off. But, you mark, I stand by you through thick and
thin. I didn’t mean to; no, not till you spoke up. I was about desperate to lose that much
blunt, and be hanged into the bargain. But I see you was the right sort. I says to myself,
you stand by Hawkins, John, and Hawkins’ll stand by you. You’re his last card, and by
the living thunder, John, he’s yours! Back to back, says I. You save your witness, and
he’ll save your neck!”
I began dimly to understand.
“You mean all’s lost?” I asked.
“Aye, by gum, I do!” he answered. “Ship gone, neck gone—that’s the size of it. Once
I looked into that bay, Jim Hawkins, and seen no schooner—well, I’m tough, but I gave
out. As for that lot and their council, mark me, they’re outright fools and cowards. I’ll
save your life—if so be as I can—from them. But, see here, Jim—tit for tat—you save
Long John from swinging.”
I was bewildered; it seemed a thing so hopeless he was asking—he, the old
buccaneer, the ringleader throughout.
“What I can do, that I’ll do,” I said.

Treasure Island P a g e | 178

 “It’s a bargain!” cried Long John. “You speak up plucky, and by thunder, I’ve a
chance!”
He hobbled to the torch, where it stood propped among the firewood, and took a
fresh light to his pipe.
“Understand me, Jim,” he said, returning. “I’ve a head on my shoulders, I have. I’m
on squire’s side now. I know you’ve got that ship safe somewheres. How you done it, I
don’t know, but safe it is. I guess Hands and O’Brien turned soft. I never much believed
in neither of them. Now you mark me. I ask no questions, nor I won’t let others. I know
when a game’s up, I do; and I know a lad that’s staunch. Ah, you that’s young—you and
me might have done a power of good together!”
He drew some cognac from the cask into a tin cannikin.
“Will you taste, messmate?” he asked; and when I had refused: “Well, I’ll take a dram
myself, Jim,” said he. “I need a caulker, for there’s trouble on hand. And talking o’
trouble, why did that doctor give me the chart, Jim?”
My face expressed a wonder so unaffected that he saw the needlessness of further
questions.
“Ah, well, he did, though,” said he. “And there’s something under that, no doubt—
something, surely, under that, Jim—bad or good.”
And he took another swallow of the brandy, shaking his great fair head like a man
who looks forward to the worst.

Treasure Island P a g e | 179

 The Black Spot Again
THE council of buccaneers had lasted some time, when one of them re-entered the
house, and with a repetition of the same salute, which had in my eyes an ironical air,
begged for a moment’s loan of the torch. Silver briefly agreed, and this emissary retired
again, leaving us together in the dark.
“There’s a breeze coming, Jim,” said Silver, who had by this time adopted quite a
friendly and familiar tone.
I turned to the loophole nearest me and looked out. The embers of the great fire had
so far burned themselves out and now glowed so low and duskily that I understood why
these conspirators desired a torch. About half-way down the slope to the stockade, they
were collected in a group; one held the light, another was on his knees in their midst,
and I saw the blade of an open knife shine in his hand with varying colours in the moon
and torchlight. The rest were all somewhat stooping, as though watching the
manoeuvres of this last. I could just make out that he had a book as well as a knife in
his hand, and was still wondering how anything so incongruous had come in their
possession when the kneeling figure rose once more to his feet and the whole party
began to move together towards the house.

Treasure Island P a g e | 180

Treasure Island P a g e | 181
 “Here they come,” said I; and I returned to my former position, for it seemed beneath
my dignity that they should find me watching them.
“Well, let ’em come, lad—let ’em come,” said Silver cheerily. “I’ve still a shot in my
locker.”
The door opened, and the five men, standing huddled together just inside, pushed
one of their number forward. In any other circumstances it would have been comical to
see his slow advance, hesitating as he set down each foot, but holding his closed right
hand in front of him.
“Step up, lad,” cried Silver. “I won’t eat you. Hand it over, lubber. I know the rules, I
do; I won’t hurt a depytation.”
Thus encouraged, the buccaneer stepped forth more briskly, and having passed
something to Silver, from hand to hand, slipped yet more smartly back again to his
companions.
The sea-cook looked at what had been given him.
“The black spot! I thought so,” he observed. “Where might you have got the paper?
Why, hillo! Look here, now; this ain’t lucky! You’ve gone and cut this out of a Bible.
What fool’s cut a Bible?”
“Ah, there!” said Morgan. “There! Wot did I say? No good’ll come o’ that, I said.”
“Well, you’ve about fixed it now, among you,” continued Silver. “You’ll all swing now,
I reckon. What soft-headed lubber had a Bible?”
“It was Dick,” said one.
“Dick, was it? Then Dick can get to prayers,” said Silver. “He’s seen his slice of luck,
has Dick, and you may lay to that.”
But here the long man with the yellow eyes struck in.
“Belay that talk, John Silver,” he said. “This crew has tipped you the black spot in full
council, as in dooty bound; just you turn it over, as in dooty bound, and see what’s
wrote there. Then you can talk.”
“Thanky, George,” replied the sea-cook. “You always was brisk for business, and has
the rules by heart, George, as I’m pleased to see. Well, what is it, anyway? Ah!
‘Deposed’—that’s it, is it? Very pretty wrote, to be sure; like print, I swear. Your hand
o’ write, George? Why, you was gettin’ quite a leadin’ man in this here crew. You’ll be
cap’n next, I shouldn’t wonder. Just oblige me with that torch again, will you? This pipe
don’t draw.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 182

 “Come, now,” said George, “you don’t fool this crew no more. You’re a funny man,
by your account; but you’re over now, and you’ll maybe step down off that barrel and
help vote.”
“I thought you said you knowed the rules,” returned Silver contemptuously.
“Leastways, if you don’t, I do; and I wait here—and I’m still your cap’n, mind—till you
outs with your grievances and I reply; in the meantime, your black spot ain’t worth a
biscuit. After that, we’ll see.”
“Oh,” replied George, “you don’t be under no kind of apprehension; we’re all square,
we are. First, you’ve made a hash of this cruise—you’ll be a bold man to say no to that.
Second, you let the enemy out o’ this here trap for nothing. Why did they want out? I
dunno, but it’s pretty plain they wanted it. Third, you wouldn’t let us go at them upon
the march. Oh, we see through you, John Silver; you want to play booty, that’s what’s
wrong with you. And then, fourth, there’s this here boy.”
“Is that all?” asked Silver quietly.
“Enough, too,” retorted George. “We’ll all swing and sun-dry for your bungling.”
“Well now, look here, I’ll answer these four p’ints; one after another I’ll answer ’em.
I made a hash o’ this cruise, did I? Well now, you all know what I wanted, and you all
know if that had been done that we’d ’a been aboard the Hispaniola this night as ever
was, every man of us alive, and fit, and full of good plum-duff, and the treasure in the
hold of her, by thunder! Well, who crossed me? Who forced my hand, as was the lawful
cap’n? Who tipped me the black spot the day we landed and began this dance? Ah, it’s
a fine dance—I’m with you there—and looks mighty like a hornpipe in a rope’s end at
Execution Dock by London town, it does. But who done it? Why, it was Anderson, and
Hands, and you, George Merry! And you’re the last above board of that same meddling
crew; and you have the Davy Jones’s insolence to up and stand for cap’n over me—you,
that sank the lot of us! By the powers! But this tops the stiffest yarn to nothing.”
Silver paused, and I could see by the faces of George and his late comrades that these
words had not been said in vain.
“That’s for number one,” cried the accused, wiping the sweat from his brow, for he
had been talking with a vehemence that shook the house. “Why, I give you my word,
I’m sick to speak to you. You’ve neither sense nor memory, and I leave it to fancy where
your mothers was that let you come to sea. Sea! Gentlemen o’ fortune! I reckon tailors
is your trade.”
“Go on, John,” said Morgan. “Speak up to the others.”
“Ah, the others!” returned John. “They’re a nice lot, ain’t they? You say this cruise is
bungled. Ah! By gum, if you could understand how bad it’s bungled, you would see!

Treasure Island P a g e | 183

We’re that near the gibbet that my neck’s stiff with thinking on it. You’ve seen ’em,
maybe, hanged in chains, birds about ’em, seamen p’inting ’em out as they go down
with the tide. ‘Who’s that?’ says one. ‘That! Why, that’s John Silver. I knowed him well,’
says another. And you can hear the chains a-jangle as you go about and reach for the
other buoy. Now, that’s about where we are, every mother’s son of us, thanks to him,
and Hands, and Anderson, and other ruination fools of you. And if you want to know
about number four, and that boy, why, shiver my timbers, isn’t he a hostage? Are we a-
going to waste a hostage? No, not us; he might be our last chance, and I shouldn’t
wonder. Kill that boy? Not me, mates! And number three? Ah, well, there’s a deal to
say to number three. Maybe you don’t count it nothing to have a real college doctor to
see you every day—you, John, with your head broke—or you, George Merry, that had
the ague shakes upon you not six hours agone, and has your eyes the colour of lemon
peel to this same moment on the clock? And maybe, perhaps, you didn’t know there
was a consort coming either? But there is, and not so long till then; and we’ll see who’ll
be glad to have a hostage when it comes to that. And as for number two, and why I
made a bargain—well, you came crawling on your knees to me to make it—on your
knees you came, you was that downhearted—and you’d have starved too if I hadn’t—
but that’s a trifle! You look there—that’s why!”
And he cast down upon the floor a paper that I instantly recognized—none other than
the chart on yellow paper, with the three red crosses, that I had found in the oilcloth at
the bottom of the captain’s chest. Why the doctor had given it to him was more than I
could fancy.
But if it were inexplicable to me, the appearance of the chart was incredible to the
surviving mutineers. They leaped upon it like cats upon a mouse. It went from hand to
hand, one tearing it from another; and by the oaths and the cries and the childish
laughter with which they accompanied their examination, you would have thought, not
only they were fingering the very gold, but were at sea with it, besides, in safety.
“Yes,” said one, “that’s Flint, sure enough. J. F., and a score below, with a clove hitch
to it; so he done ever.”
“Mighty pretty,” said George. “But how are we to get away with it, and us no ship.”
Silver suddenly sprang up, and supporting himself with a hand against the wall: “Now
I give you warning, George,” he cried. “One more word of your sauce, and I’ll call you
down and fight you. How? Why, how do I know? You had ought to tell me that—you
and the rest, that lost me my schooner, with your interference, burn you! But not you,
you can’t; you hain’t got the invention of a cockroach. But civil you can speak, and shall,
George Merry, you may lay to that.”
“That’s fair enow,” said the old man Morgan.

Treasure Island P a g e | 184

 “Fair! I reckon so,” said the sea-cook. “You lost the ship; I found the treasure. Who’s
the better man at that? And now I resign, by thunder! Elect whom you please to be your
cap’n now; I’m done with it.”
“Silver!” they cried. “Barbecue forever! Barbecue for cap’n!”
“So that’s the toon, is it?” cried the cook. “George, I reckon you’ll have to wait another
turn, friend; and lucky for you as I’m not a revengeful man. But that was never my way.
And now, shipmates, this black spot? ’Tain’t much good now, is it? Dick’s crossed his
luck and spoiled his Bible, and that’s about all.”
“It’ll do to kiss the book on still, won’t it?” growled Dick, who was evidently uneasy
at the curse he had brought upon himself.
“A Bible with a bit cut out!” returned Silver derisively. “Not it. It don’t bind no more’n
a ballad-book.”
“Don’t it, though?” cried Dick with a sort of joy. “Well, I reckon that’s worth having
too.”
“Here, Jim—here’s a cur’osity for you,” said Silver, and he tossed me the paper.
It was around about the size of a crown piece. One side was blank, for it had been the
last leaf; the other contained a verse or two of Revelation—these words among the
rest, which struck sharply home upon my mind: “Without are dogs and murderers.” The
printed side had been blackened with wood ash, which already began to come off and
soil my fingers; on the blank side had been written with the same material the one word
“Depposed.” I have that curiosity beside me at this moment, but not a trace of writing
now remains beyond a single scratch, such as a man might make with his thumb-nail.
That was the end of the night’s business. Soon after, with a drink all round, we lay
down to sleep, and the outside of Silver’s vengeance was to put George Merry up for
sentinel and threaten him with death if he should prove unfaithful.
It was long ere I could close an eye, and heaven knows I had matter enough for
thought in the man whom I had slain that afternoon, in my own most perilous position,
and above all, in the remarkable game that I saw Silver now engaged upon—keeping
the mutineers together with one hand and grasping with the other after every means,
possible and impossible, to make his peace and save his miserable life. He himself slept
peacefully and snored aloud, yet my heart was sore for him, wicked as he was, to think
on the dark perils that environed and the shameful gibbet that awaited him.

Treasure Island P a g e | 185

 On Parole
I WAS wakened—indeed, we were all wakened, for I could see even the sentinel
shake himself together from where he had fallen against the door-post—by a clear,
hearty voice hailing us from the margin of the wood:
“Block house, ahoy!” it cried. “Here’s the doctor.”
And the doctor it was. Although I was glad to hear the sound, yet my gladness was
not without admixture. I remembered with confusion my insubordinate and stealthy
conduct, and when I saw where it had brought me—among what companions and
surrounded by what dangers—I felt ashamed to look him in the face.
He must have risen in the dark, for the day had hardly come; and when I ran to a
loophole and looked out, I saw him standing, like Silver once before, up to the mid-leg
in creeping vapour.
“You, doctor! Top o’ the morning to you, sir!” cried Silver, broad awake and beaming
with good nature in a moment. “Bright and early, to be sure; and it’s the early bird, as
the saying goes, that gets the rations. George, shake up your timbers, son, and help Dr.
Livesey over the ship’s side. All a-doin’ well, your patients was—all well and merry.”
So he pattered on, standing on the hilltop with his crutch under his elbow and one
hand upon the side of the log-house—quite the old John in voice, manner, and
expression.

Treasure Island P a g e | 186

 “We’ve quite a surprise for you too, sir,” he continued. “We’ve a little stranger here—
he! he! A noo boarder and lodger, sir, and looking fit and taut as a fiddle; slep’ like a
supercargo, he did, right alongside of John—stem to stem we was, all night.”
Dr. Livesey was by this time across the stockade and pretty near the cook, and I could
hear the alteration in his voice as he said, “Not Jim?”
“The very same Jim as ever was,” says Silver.
The doctor stopped outright, although he did not speak, and it was some seconds
before he seemed able to move on.
“Well, well,” he said at last, “duty first and pleasure afterwards, as you might have
said yourself, Silver. Let us overhaul these patients of yours.”
A moment afterwards he had entered the block house and with one grim nod to me
proceeded with his work among the sick. He seemed under no apprehension, though
he must have known that his life, among these treacherous demons, depended on a
hair; and he rattled on to his patients as if he were paying an ordinary professional visit
in a quiet English family. His manner, I suppose, reacted on the men, for they behaved
to him as if nothing had occurred, as if he were still ship’s doctor and they still faithful
hands before the mast.
“You’re doing well, my friend,” he said to the fellow with the bandaged head, “and if
ever any person had a close shave, it was you; your head must be as hard as iron. Well,
George, how goes it? You’re a pretty colour, certainly; why, your liver, man, is upside
down. Did you take that medicine? Did he take that medicine, men?”
“Aye, aye, sir, he took it, sure enough,” returned Morgan.
“Because, you see, since I am mutineers’ doctor, or prison doctor as I prefer to call
it,” says Doctor Livesey in his pleasantest way, “I make it a point of honour not to lose
a man for King George (God bless him!) and the gallows.”
The rogues looked at each other but swallowed the home-thrust in silence.
“Dick don’t feel well, sir,” said one.
“Don’t he?” replied the doctor. “Well, step up here, Dick, and let me see your tongue.
No, I should be surprised if he did! The man’s tongue is fit to frighten the French.
Another fever.”
“Ah, there,” said Morgan, “that comed of sp’iling Bibles.”
“That comes—as you call it—of being arrant asses,” retorted the doctor, “and not
having sense enough to know honest air from poison, and the dry land from a vile,
pestiferous slough. I think it most probable—though of course it’s only an opinion—
that you’ll all have the deuce to pay before you get that malaria out of your systems.

Treasure Island P a g e | 187

Camp in a bog, would you? Silver, I’m surprised at you. You’re less of a fool than many,
take you all round; but you don’t appear to me to have the rudiments of a notion of the
rules of health.
“Well,” he added after he had dosed them round and they had taken his
prescriptions, with really laughable humility, more like charity schoolchildren than
blood-guilty mutineers and pirates—“well, that’s done for today. And now I should wish
to have a talk with that boy, please.”
And he nodded his head in my direction carelessly.
George Merry was at the door, spitting and spluttering over some bad-tasted
medicine; but at the first word of the doctor’s proposal he swung round with a deep
flush and cried “No!” and swore.
Silver struck the barrel with his open hand.
“Si-lence!” he roared and looked about him positively like a lion. “Doctor,” he went
on in his usual tones, “I was a-thinking of that, knowing as how you had a fancy for the
boy. We’re all humbly grateful for your kindness, and as you see, puts faith in you and
takes the drugs down like that much grog. And I take it I’ve found a way as’ll suit all.
Hawkins, will you give me your word of honour as a young gentleman—for a young
gentleman you are, although poor born—your word of honour not to slip your cable?”
I readily gave the pledge required.
“Then, doctor,” said Silver, “you just step outside o’ that stockade, and once you’re
there I’ll bring the boy down on the inside, and I reckon you can yarn through the spars.
Good day to you, sir, and all our dooties to the squire and Cap’n Smollett.”
The explosion of disapproval, which nothing but Silver’s black looks had restrained,
broke out immediately the doctor had left the house. Silver was roundly accused of
playing double—of trying to make a separate peace for himself, of sacrificing the
interests of his accomplices and victims, and, in one word, of the identical, exact thing
that he was doing. It seemed to me so obvious, in this case, that I could not imagine
how he was to turn their anger. But he was twice the man the rest were, and his last
night’s victory had given him a huge preponderance on their minds. He called them all
the fools and dolts you can imagine, said it was necessary I should talk to the doctor,
fluttered the chart in their faces, asked them if they could afford to break the treaty the
very day they were bound a-treasure-hunting.
“No, by thunder!” he cried. “It’s us must break the treaty when the time comes; and
till then I’ll gammon that doctor, if I have to ile his boots with brandy.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 188

 And then he bade them get the fire lit, and stalked out upon his crutch, with his hand
on my shoulder, leaving them in a disarray, and silenced by his volubility rather than
convinced.
“Slow, lad, slow,” he said. “They might round upon us in a twinkle of an eye if we was
seen to hurry.”
Very deliberately, then, did we advance across the sand to where the doctor awaited
us on the other side of the stockade, and as soon as we were within easy speaking
distance Silver stopped.
“You’ll make a note of this here also, doctor,” says he, “and the boy’ll tell you how I
saved his life, and were deposed for it too, and you may lay to that. Doctor, when a
man’s steering as near the wind as me—playing chuck-farthing with the last breath in
his body, like—you wouldn’t think it too much, mayhap, to give him one good word?
You’ll please bear in mind it’s not my life only now—it’s that boy’s into the bargain; and
you’ll speak me fair, doctor, and give me a bit o’ hope to go on, for the sake of mercy.”
Silver was a changed man once he was out there and had his back to his friends and
the block house; his cheeks seemed to have fallen in, his voice trembled; never was a
soul more dead in earnest.
“Why, John, you’re not afraid?” asked Dr. Livesey.
“Doctor, I’m no coward; no, not I—not so much!” and he snapped his fingers. “If I was
I wouldn’t say it. But I’ll own up fairly, I’ve the shakes upon me for the gallows. You’re
a good man and a true; I never seen a better man! And you’ll not forget what I done
good, not any more than you’ll forget the bad, I know. And I step aside—see here—and
leave you and Jim alone. And you’ll put that down for me too, for it’s a long stretch, is
that!”
So saying, he stepped back a little way, till he was out of earshot, and there sat down
upon a tree-stump and began to whistle, spinning round now and again upon his seat
so as to command a sight, sometimes of me and the doctor and sometimes of his unruly
ruffians as they went to and fro in the sand between the fire—which they were busy
rekindling—and the house, from which they brought forth pork and bread to make the
breakfast.
“So, Jim,” said the doctor sadly, “here you are. As you have brewed, so shall you drink,
my boy. Heaven knows, I cannot find it in my heart to blame you, but this much I will
say, be it kind or unkind: when Captain Smollett was well, you dared not have gone off;
and when he was ill and couldn’t help it, by George, it was downright cowardly!”
I will own that I here began to weep. “Doctor,” I said, “you might spare me. I have
blamed myself enough; my life’s forfeit anyway, and I should have been dead by now if

Treasure Island P a g e | 189

Silver hadn’t stood for me; and doctor, believe this, I can die—and I dare say I deserve
it—but what I fear is torture. If they come to torture me—”
“Jim,” the doctor interrupted, and his voice was quite changed, “Jim, I can’t have this.
Whip over, and we’ll run for it.”
“Doctor,” said I, “I passed my word.”
“I know, I know,” he cried. “We can’t help that, Jim, now. I’ll take it on my shoulders,
holus bolus, blame and shame, my boy; but stay here, I cannot let you. Jump! One jump,
and you’re out, and we’ll run for it like antelopes.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 190

Treasure Island P a g e | 191
 “No,” I replied; “you know right well you wouldn’t do the thing yourself—neither you
nor squire nor captain; and no more will I. Silver trusted me; I passed my word, and
back I go. But, doctor, you did not let me finish. If they come to torture me, I might let
slip a word of where the ship is, for I got the ship, part by luck and part by risking, and
she lies in North Inlet, on the southern beach, and just below high water. At half tide
she must be high and dry.”
“The ship!” exclaimed the doctor.
Rapidly I described to him my adventures, and he heard me out in silence.
“There is a kind of fate in this,” he observed when I had done. “Every step, it’s you
that saves our lives; and do you suppose by any chance that we are going to let you lose
yours? That would be a poor return, my boy. You found out the plot; you found Ben
Gunn—the best deed that ever you did, or will do, though you live to ninety. Oh, by
Jupiter, and talking of Ben Gunn! Why, this is the mischief in person. Silver!” he cried.
“Silver! I’ll give you a piece of advice,” he continued as the cook drew near again; “don’t
you be in any great hurry after that treasure.”
“Why, sir, I do my possible, which that ain’t,” said Silver. “I can only, asking your
pardon, save my life and the boy’s by seeking for that treasure; and you may lay to
that.”
“Well, Silver,” replied the doctor, “if that is so, I’ll go one step further: look out for
squalls when you find it.”
“Sir,” said Silver, “as between man and man, that’s too much and too little. What
you’re after, why you left the block house, why you given me that there chart, I don’t
know, now, do I? And yet I done your bidding with my eyes shut and never a word of
hope! But no, this here’s too much. If you won’t tell me what you mean plain out, just
say so and I’ll leave the helm.”
“No,” said the doctor musingly; “I’ve no right to say more; it’s not my secret, you see,
Silver, or, I give you my word, I’d tell it you. But I’ll go as far with you as I dare go, and a
step beyond, for I’ll have my wig sorted by the captain or I’m mistaken! And first, I’ll
give you a bit of hope; Silver, if we both get alive out of this wolf-trap, I’ll do my best to
save you, short of perjury.”
Silver’s face was radiant. “You couldn’t say more, I’m sure, sir, not if you was my
mother,” he cried.
“Well, that’s my first concession,” added the doctor. “My second is a piece of advice:
keep the boy close beside you, and when you need help, halloo. I’m off to seek it for
you, and that itself will show you if I speak at random. Good-bye, Jim.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 192

 And Dr. Livesey shook hands with me through the stockade, nodded to Silver, and set
off at a brisk pace into the wood.

Treasure Island P a g e | 193

 The Treasure-hunt—Flint’s Pointer
“JIM,” said Silver when we were alone, “if I saved your life, you saved mine; and I’ll
not forget it. I seen the doctor waving you to run for it—with the tail of my eye, I did;
and I seen you say no, as plain as hearing. Jim, that’s one to you. This is the first glint of
hope I had since the attack failed, and I owe it you. And now, Jim, we’re to go in for this
here treasure-hunting, with sealed orders too, and I don’t like it; and you and me must
stick close, back to back like, and we’ll save our necks in spite o’ fate and fortune.”
Just then a man hailed us from the fire that breakfast was ready, and we were soon
seated here and there about the sand over biscuit and fried junk. They had lit a fire fit
to roast an ox, and it was now grown so hot that they could only approach it from the
windward, and even there not without precaution. In the same wasteful spirit, they had
cooked, I suppose, three times more than we could eat; and one of them, with an empty
laugh, threw what was left into the fire, which blazed and roared again over this unusual
fuel. I never in my life saw men so careless of the morrow; hand to mouth is the only
word that can describe their way of doing; and what with wasted food and sleeping
sentries, though they were bold enough for a brush and be done with it, I could see
their entire unfitness for anything like a prolonged campaign.
Even Silver, eating away, with Captain Flint upon his shoulder, had not a word of
blame for their recklessness. And this the more surprised me, for I thought he had never
shown himself so cunning as he did then.

Treasure Island P a g e | 194

 “Aye, mates,” said he, “it’s lucky you have Barbecue to think for you with this here
head. I got what I wanted, I did. Sure enough, they have the ship. Where they have it, I
don’t know yet; but once we hit the treasure, we’ll have to jump about and find out.
And then, mates, us that has the boats, I reckon, has the upper hand.”
Thus he kept running on, with his mouth full of the hot bacon; thus he restored their
hope and confidence, and, I more than suspect, repaired his own at the same time.
“As for hostage,” he continued, “that’s his last talk, I guess, with them he loves so
dear. I’ve got my piece o’ news, and thanky to him for that; but it’s over and done. I’ll
take him in a line when we go treasure-hunting, for we’ll keep him like so much gold, in
case of accidents, you mark, and in the meantime. Once we got the ship and treasure
both and off to sea like jolly companions, why then we’ll talk Mr. Hawkins over, we will,
and we’ll give him his share, to be sure, for all his kindness.”
It was no wonder the men were in a good humour now. For my part, I was horribly
cast down. Should the scheme he had now sketched prove feasible, Silver, already
doubly a traitor, would not hesitate to adopt it. He had still a foot in either camp, and
there was no doubt he would prefer wealth and freedom with the pirates to a bare
escape from hanging, which was the best he had to hope on our side.
Nay, and even if things so fell out that he was forced to keep his faith with Dr. Livesey,
even then what danger lay before us! What a moment that would be when the
suspicions of his followers turned to certainty and he and I should have to fight for dear
life—he a cripple and I a boy—against five strong and active seamen!
Add to this double apprehension the mystery that still hung over the behaviour of my
friends, their unexplained desertion of the stockade, their inexplicable cession of the
chart, or harder still to understand, the doctor’s last warning to Silver, “Look out for
squalls when you find it,” and you will readily believe how little taste I found in my
breakfast and with how uneasy a heart I set forth behind my captors on the quest for
treasure.
We made a curious figure, had anyone been there to see us—all in soiled sailor
clothes and all but me armed to the teeth. Silver had two guns slung about him—one
before and one behind—besides the great cutlass at his waist and a pistol in each pocket
of his square-tailed coat. To complete his strange appearance, Captain Flint sat perched
upon his shoulder and gabbling odds and ends of purposeless sea-talk. I had a line about
my waist and followed obediently after the sea-cook, who held the loose end of the
rope, now in his free hand, now between his powerful teeth. For all the world, I was led
like a dancing bear.

Treasure Island P a g e | 195

 The other men were variously burthened, some carrying picks and shovels—for that
had been the very first necessary they brought ashore from the Hispaniola—others
laden with pork, bread, and brandy for the midday meal. All the stores, I observed, came
from our stock, and I could see the truth of Silver’s words the night before. Had he not
struck a bargain with the doctor, he and his mutineers, deserted by the ship, must have
been driven to subsist on clear water and the proceeds of their hunting. Water would
have been little to their taste; a sailor is not usually a good shot; and besides all that,
when they were so short of eatables, it was not likely they would be very flush of
powder.
Well, thus equipped, we all set out—even the fellow with the broken head, who
should certainly have kept in shadow—and straggled, one after another, to the beach,
where the two gigs awaited us. Even these bore trace of the drunken folly of the pirates,
one in a broken thwart, and both in their muddy and unbailed condition. Both were to
be carried along with us for the sake of safety; and so, with our numbers divided
between them, we set forth upon the bosom of the anchorage.

Treasure Island P a g e | 196

 As we pulled over, there was some discussion on the chart. The red cross was, of
course, far too large to be a guide; and the terms of the note on the back, as you will
hear, admitted of some ambiguity. They ran, the reader may remember, thus:
Tall tree, Spy-glass shoulder, bearing a point to the N. of N.N.E.
Skeleton Island E.S.E. and by E.
Ten feet.
A tall tree was thus the principal mark. Now, right before us the anchorage was
bounded by a plateau from two to three hundred feet high, adjoining on the north the
sloping southern shoulder of the Spy-glass and rising again towards the south into the
rough, cliffy eminence called the Mizzen-mast Hill. The top of the plateau was dotted
thickly with pine-trees of varying height. Every here and there, one of a different species
rose forty or fifty feet clear above its neighbours, and which of these was the particular
“tall tree” of Captain Flint could only be decided on the spot, and by the readings of the
compass.
Yet, although that was the case, every man on board the boats had picked a favourite
of his own ere we were half-way over, Long John alone shrugging his shoulders and
bidding them wait till they were there.
We pulled easily, by Silver’s directions, not to weary the hands prematurely, and after
quite a long passage, landed at the mouth of the second river—that which runs down a
woody cleft of the Spy-glass. Thence, bending to our left, we began to ascend the slope
towards the plateau.
At the first outset, heavy, miry ground and a matted, marish vegetation greatly
delayed our progress; but by little and little the hill began to steepen and become stony
under foot, and the wood to change its character and to grow in a more open order. It
was, indeed, a most pleasant portion of the island that we were now approaching. A
heavy-scented broom and many flowering shrubs had almost taken the place of grass.
Thickets of green nutmeg-trees were dotted here and there with the red columns and
the broad shadow of the pines; and the first mingled their spice with the aroma of the
others. The air, besides, was fresh and stirring, and this, under the sheer sunbeams, was
a wonderful refreshment to our senses.
The party spread itself abroad, in a fan shape, shouting and leaping to and fro. About
the centre, and a good way behind the rest, Silver and I followed—I tethered by my
rope, he ploughing, with deep pants, among the sliding gravel. From time to time,
indeed, I had to lend him a hand, or he must have missed his footing and fallen
backward down the hill.

Treasure Island P a g e | 197

 We had thus proceeded for about half a mile and were approaching the brow of the
plateau when the man upon the farthest left began to cry aloud, as if in terror. Shout
after shout came from him, and the others began to run in his direction.
“He can’t ’a found the treasure,” said old Morgan, hurrying past us from the right,
“for that’s clean a-top.”
Indeed, as we found when we also reached the spot, it was something very different.
At the foot of a pretty big pine and involved in a green creeper, which had even partly
lifted some of the smaller bones, a human skeleton lay, with a few shreds of clothing,
on the ground. I believe a chill struck for a moment to every heart.
“He was a seaman,” said George Merry, who, bolder than the rest, had gone up close
and was examining the rags of clothing. “Leastways, this is good sea-cloth.”
“Aye, aye,” said Silver; “like enough; you wouldn’t look to find a bishop here, I reckon.
But what sort of a way is that for bones to lie? ’Tain’t in natur’.”
Indeed, on a second glance, it seemed impossible to fancy that the body was in a
natural position. But for some disarray (the work, perhaps, of the birds that had fed
upon him or of the slow-growing creeper that had gradually enveloped his remains) the
man lay perfectly straight—his feet pointing in one direction, his hands, raised above
his head like a diver’s, pointing directly in the opposite.
“I’ve taken a notion into my old numbskull,” observed Silver. “Here’s the compass;
there’s the tip-top p’int o’ Skeleton Island, stickin’ out like a tooth. Just take a bearing,
will you, along the line of them bones.”
It was done. The body pointed straight in the direction of the island, and the compass
read duly E.S.E. and by E.
“I thought so,” cried the cook; “this here is a p’inter. Right up there is our line for the
Pole Star and the jolly dollars. But, by thunder! If it don’t make me cold inside to think
of Flint. This is one of his jokes, and no mistake. Him and these six was alone here; he
killed ’em, every man; and this one he hauled here and laid down by compass, shiver
my timbers! They’re long bones, and the hair’s been yellow. Aye, that would be
Allardyce. You mind Allardyce, Tom Morgan?”
“Aye, aye,” returned Morgan; “I mind him; he owed me money, he did, and took my
knife ashore with him.”
“Speaking of knives,” said another, “why don’t we find his’n lying round? Flint warn’t
the man to pick a seaman’s pocket; and the birds, I guess, would leave it be.”
“By the powers, and that’s true!” cried Silver.
“There ain’t a thing left here,” said Merry, still feeling round among the bones; “not
a copper doit nor a baccy box. It don’t look nat’ral to me.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 198

 “No, by gum, it don’t,” agreed Silver; “not nat’ral, nor not nice, says you. Great guns!
Messmates, but if Flint was living, this would be a hot spot for you and me. Six they
were, and six are we; and bones is what they are now.”
“I saw him dead with these here deadlights,” said Morgan. “Billy took me in. There
he laid, with penny-pieces on his eyes.”
“Dead—aye, sure enough he’s dead and gone below,” said the fellow with the
bandage; “but if ever sperrit walked, it would be Flint’s. Dear heart, but he died bad,
did Flint!”
“Aye, that he did,” observed another; “now he raged, and now he hollered for the
rum, and now he sang. ‘Fifteen Men’ were his only song, mates; and I tell you true, I
never rightly liked to hear it since. It was main hot, and the windy was open, and I hear
that old song comin’ out as clear as clear—and the death-haul on the man already.”
“Come, come,” said Silver; “stow this talk. He’s dead, and he don’t walk, that I know;
leastways, he won’t walk by day, and you may lay to that. Care killed a cat. Fetch ahead
for the doubloons.”
We started, certainly; but in spite of the hot sun and the staring daylight, the pirates
no longer ran separate and shouting through the wood, but kept side by side and spoke
with bated breath. The terror of the dead buccaneer had fallen on their spirits.

Treasure Island P a g e | 199

 The Treasure-hunt—The Voice Among the Trees
PARTLY from the damping influence of this alarm, partly to rest Silver and the sick
folk, the whole party sat down as soon as they had gained the brow of the ascent.
The plateau being somewhat tilted towards the west, this spot on which we had
paused commanded a wide prospect on either hand. Before us, over the tree-tops, we
beheld the Cape of the Woods fringed with surf; behind, we not only looked down upon
the anchorage and Skeleton Island, but saw—clear across the spit and the eastern
lowlands—a great field of open sea upon the east. Sheer above us rose the Spyglass,
here dotted with single pines, there black with precipices. There was no sound but that
of the distant breakers, mounting from all round, and the chirp of countless insects in
the brush. Not a man, not a sail, upon the sea; the very largeness of the view increased
the sense of solitude.
Silver, as he sat, took certain bearings with his compass.
“There are three ‘tall trees’” said he, “about in the right line from Skeleton Island.
‘Spy-glass shoulder,’ I take it, means that lower p’int there. It’s child’s play to find the
stuff now. I’ve half a mind to dine first.”
“I don’t feel sharp,” growled Morgan. “Thinkin’ o’ Flint—I think it were—as done me.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 200

 “Ah, well, my son, you praise your stars he’s dead,” said Silver.
“He were an ugly devil,” cried a third pirate with a shudder; “that blue in the face
too!”
“That was how the rum took him,” added Merry. “Blue! Well, I reckon he was blue.
That’s a true word.”
Ever since they had found the skeleton and got upon this train of thought, they had
spoken lower and lower, and they had almost got to whispering by now, so that the
sound of their talk hardly interrupted the silence of the wood. All of a sudden, out of
the middle of the trees in front of us, a thin, high, trembling voice struck up the well-
known air and words:
“Fifteen men on the dead man’s chest—
Yo-ho-ho, and a bottle of rum!”

I never have seen men more dreadfully affected than the pirates. The colour went
from their six faces like enchantment; some leaped to their feet, some clawed hold of
others; Morgan grovelled on the ground.
“It’s Flint, by ——!” cried Merry.
The song had stopped as suddenly as it began—broken off, you would have said, in
the middle of a note, as though someone had laid his hand upon the singer’s mouth.
Coming through the clear, sunny atmosphere among the green tree-tops, I thought it
had sounded airily and sweetly; and the effect on my companions was the stranger.
“Come,” said Silver, struggling with his ashen lips to get the word out; “this won’t do.
Stand by to go about. This is a rum start, and I can’t name the voice, but it’s someone
skylarking—someone that’s flesh and blood, and you may lay to that.”
His courage had come back as he spoke, and some of the colour to his face along with
it. Already the others had begun to lend an ear to this encouragement and were coming
a little to themselves, when the same voice broke out again—not this time singing, but
in a faint distant hail that echoed yet fainter among the clefts of the Spy-glass.
“Darby M’Graw,” it wailed—for that is the word that best describes the sound—
“Darby M’Graw! Darby M’Graw!” again and again and again; and then rising a little
higher, and with an oath that I leave out: “Fetch aft the rum, Darby!”

Treasure Island P a g e | 201

Treasure Island P a g e | 202
 The buccaneers remained rooted to the ground, their eyes starting from their heads.
Long after the voice had died away they still stared in silence, dreadfully, before them.
“That fixes it!” gasped one. “Let’s go.”
“They was his last words,” moaned Morgan, “his last words above board.”
Dick had his Bible out and was praying volubly. He had been well brought up, had
Dick, before he came to sea and fell among bad companions.
Still Silver was unconquered. I could hear his teeth rattle in his head, but he had not
yet surrendered.
“Nobody in this here island ever heard of Darby,” he muttered; “not one but us that’s
here.” And then, making a great effort: “Shipmates,” he cried, “I’m here to get that
stuff, and I’ll not be beat by man or devil. I never was feared of Flint in his life, and, by
the powers, I’ll face him dead. There’s seven hundred thousand pound not a quarter of
a mile from here. When did ever a gentleman o’ fortune show his stern to that much
dollars for a boozy old seaman with a blue mug—and him dead too?”
But there was no sign of reawakening courage in his followers, rather, indeed, of
growing terror at the irreverence of his words.
“Belay there, John!” said Merry. “Don’t you cross a sperrit.”
And the rest were all too terrified to reply. They would have run away severally had
they dared; but fear kept them together, and kept them close by John, as if his daring
helped them. He, on his part, had pretty well fought his weakness down.
“Sperrit? Well, maybe,” he said. “But there’s one thing not clear to me. There was an
echo. Now, no man ever seen a sperrit with a shadow; well then, what’s he doing with
an echo to him, I should like to know? That ain’t in natur’, surely?”
This argument seemed weak enough to me. But you can never tell what will affect
the superstitious, and to my wonder, George Merry was greatly relieved.
“Well, that’s so,” he said. “You’ve a head upon your shoulders, John, and no mistake.
’Bout ship, mates! This here crew is on a wrong tack, I do believe. And come to think on
it, it was like Flint’s voice, I grant you, but not just so clear-away like it, after all. It was
liker somebody else’s voice now—it was liker—”
“By the powers, Ben Gunn!” roared Silver.
“Aye, and so it were,” cried Morgan, springing on his knees. “Ben Gunn it were!”
“It don’t make much odds, do it, now?” asked Dick. “Ben Gunn’s not here in the body
any more’n Flint.”
But the older hands greeted this remark with scorn.
“Why, nobody minds Ben Gunn,” cried Merry; “dead or alive, nobody minds him.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 203

 It was extraordinary how their spirits had returned and how the natural colour had
revived in their faces. Soon they were chatting together, with intervals of listening; and
not long after, hearing no further sound, they shouldered the tools and set forth again,
Merry walking first with Silver’s compass to keep them on the right line with Skeleton
Island. He had said the truth: dead or alive, nobody minded Ben Gunn.
Dick alone still held his Bible, and looked around him as he went, with fearful glances;
but he found no sympathy, and Silver even joked him on his precautions.
“I told you,” said he—“I told you you had sp’iled your Bible. If it ain’t no good to swear
by, what do you suppose a sperrit would give for it? Not that!” and he snapped his big
fingers, halting a moment on his crutch.
But Dick was not to be comforted; indeed, it was soon plain to me that the lad was
falling sick; hastened by heat, exhaustion, and the shock of his alarm, the fever,
predicted by Dr. Livesey, was evidently growing swiftly higher.
It was fine open walking here, upon the summit; our way lay a little downhill, for, as
I have said, the plateau tilted towards the west. The pines, great and small, grew wide
apart; and even between the clumps of nutmeg and azalea, wide open spaces baked in
the hot sunshine. Striking, as we did, pretty near north-west across the island, we drew,
on the one hand, ever nearer under the shoulders of the Spy-glass, and on the other,
looked ever wider over that western bay where I had once tossed and trembled in the
coracle.
The first of the tall trees was reached, and by the bearings proved the wrong one. So
with the second. The third rose nearly two hundred feet into the air above a clump of
underwood—a giant of a vegetable, with a red column as big as a cottage, and a wide
shadow around in which a company could have manoeuvred. It was conspicuous far to
sea both on the east and west and might have been entered as a sailing mark upon the
chart.
But it was not its size that now impressed my companions; it was the knowledge that
seven hundred thousand pounds in gold lay somewhere buried below its spreading
shadow. The thought of the money, as they drew nearer, swallowed up their previous
terrors. Their eyes burned in their heads; their feet grew speedier and lighter; their
whole soul was bound up in that fortune, that whole lifetime of extravagance and
pleasure, that lay waiting there for each of them.
Silver hobbled, grunting, on his crutch; his nostrils stood out and quivered; he cursed
like a madman when the flies settled on his hot and shiny countenance; he plucked
furiously at the line that held me to him and from time to time turned his eyes upon me
with a deadly look. Certainly he took no pains to hide his thoughts, and certainly I read
them like print. In the immediate nearness of the gold, all else had been forgotten: his

Treasure Island P a g e | 204

promise and the doctor’s warning were both things of the past, and I could not doubt
that he hoped to seize upon the treasure, find and board the Hispaniola under cover of
night, cut every honest throat about that island, and sail away as he had at first
intended, laden with crimes and riches.
Shaken as I was with these alarms, it was hard for me to keep up with the rapid pace
of the treasure-hunters. Now and again I stumbled, and it was then that Silver plucked
so roughly at the rope and launched at me his murderous glances. Dick, who had
dropped behind us and now brought up the rear, was babbling to himself both prayers
and curses as his fever kept rising. This also added to my wretchedness, and to crown
all, I was haunted by the thought of the tragedy that had once been acted on that
plateau, when that ungodly buccaneer with the blue face—he who died at Savannah,
singing and shouting for drink—had there, with his own hand, cut down his six
accomplices. This grove that was now so peaceful must then have rung with cries, I
thought; and even with the thought I could believe I heard it ringing still.
We were now at the margin of the thicket.
“Huzza, mates, all together!” shouted Merry; and the foremost broke into a run.
And suddenly, not ten yards further, we beheld them stop. A low cry arose. Silver
doubled his pace, digging away with the foot of his crutch like one possessed; and next
moment he and I had come also to a dead halt.
Before us was a great excavation, not very recent, for the sides had fallen in and grass
had sprouted on the bottom. In this were the shaft of a pick broken in two and the
boards of several packing-cases strewn around. On one of these boards I saw, branded
with a hot iron, the name Walrus—the name of Flint’s ship.
All was clear to probation. The cache had been found and rifled; the seven hundred
thousand pounds were gone!

Treasure Island P a g e | 205

 The Fall of a Chieftain
THERE never was such an overturn in this world. Each of these six men was as though
he had been struck. But with Silver the blow passed almost instantly. Every thought of
his soul had been set full-stretch, like a racer, on that money; well, he was brought up,
in a single second, dead; and he kept his head, found his temper, and changed his plan
before the others had had time to realize the disappointment.
“Jim,” he whispered, “take that, and stand by for trouble.”
And he passed me a double-barrelled pistol.
At the same time, he began quietly moving northward, and in a few steps had put the
hollow between us two and the other five. Then he looked at me and nodded, as much
as to say, “Here is a narrow corner,” as, indeed, I thought it was. His looks were not
quite friendly, and I was so revolted at these constant changes that I could not forbear
whispering, “So you’ve changed sides again.”
There was no time left for him to answer in. The buccaneers, with oaths and cries,
began to leap, one after another, into the pit and to dig with their fingers, throwing the
boards aside as they did so. Morgan found a piece of gold. He held it up with a perfect
spout of oaths. It was a two-guinea piece, and it went from hand to hand among them
for a quarter of a minute.

Treasure Island P a g e | 206

 “Two guineas!” roared Merry, shaking it at Silver. “That’s your seven hundred
thousand pounds, is it? You’re the man for bargains, ain’t you? You’re him that never
bungled nothing, you wooden-headed lubber!”
“Dig away, boys,” said Silver with the coolest insolence; “you’ll find some pig-nuts
and I shouldn’t wonder.”
“Pig-nuts!” repeated Merry, in a scream. “Mates, do you hear that? I tell you now,
that man there knew it all along. Look in the face of him and you’ll see it wrote there.”
“Ah, Merry,” remarked Silver, “standing for cap’n again? You’re a pushing lad, to be
sure.”
But this time everyone was entirely in Merry’s favour. They began to scramble out of
the excavation, darting furious glances behind them. One thing I observed, which
looked well for us: they all got out upon the opposite side from Silver.
Well, there we stood, two on one side, five on the other, the pit between us, and
nobody screwed up high enough to offer the first blow. Silver never moved; he watched
them, very upright on his crutch, and looked as cool as ever I saw him. He was brave,
and no mistake.
At last Merry seemed to think a speech might help matters.
“Mates,” says he, “there’s two of them alone there; one’s the old cripple that brought
us all here and blundered us down to this; the other’s that cub that I mean to have the
heart of. Now, mates—”
He was raising his arm and his voice, and plainly meant to lead a charge. But just
then—crack! crack! crack!—three musket-shots flashed out of the thicket. Merry
tumbled head foremost into the excavation; the man with the bandage spun round like
a teetotum and fell all his length upon his side, where he lay dead, but still twitching;
and the other three turned and ran for it with all their might.

Treasure Island P a g e | 207

Treasure Island P a g e | 208
 Before you could wink, Long John had fired two barrels of a pistol into the struggling
Merry, and as the man rolled up his eyes at him in the last agony, “George,” said he, “I
reckon I settled you.”
At the same moment, the doctor, Gray, and Ben Gunn joined us, with smoking
muskets, from among the nutmeg-trees.
“Forward!” cried the doctor. “Double quick, my lads. We must head ’em off the
boats.”
And we set off at a great pace, sometimes plunging through the bushes to the chest.
I tell you, but Silver was anxious to keep up with us. The work that man went through,
leaping on his crutch till the muscles of his chest were fit to burst, was work no sound
man ever equalled; and so thinks the doctor. As it was, he was already thirty yards
behind us and on the verge of strangling when we reached the brow of the slope.
“Doctor,” he hailed, “see there! No hurry!”
Sure enough there was no hurry. In a more open part of the plateau, we could see
the three survivors still running in the same direction as they had started, right for
Mizzenmast Hill. We were already between them and the boats; and so we four sat
down to breathe, while Long John, mopping his face, came slowly up with us.
“Thank ye kindly, doctor,” says he. “You came in in about the nick, I guess, for me and
Hawkins. And so it’s you, Ben Gunn!” he added. “Well, you’re a nice one, to be sure.”
“I’m Ben Gunn, I am,” replied the maroon, wriggling like an eel in his embarrassment.
“And,” he added, after a long pause, “how do, Mr. Silver? Pretty well, I thank ye, says
you.”
“Ben, Ben,” murmured Silver, “to think as you’ve done me!”
The doctor sent back Gray for one of the pick-axes deserted, in their flight, by the
mutineers, and then as we proceeded leisurely downhill to where the boats were lying,
related in a few words what had taken place. It was a story that profoundly interested
Silver; and Ben Gunn, the half-idiot maroon, was the hero from beginning to end.
Ben, in his long, lonely wanderings about the island, had found the skeleton—it was
he that had rifled it; he had found the treasure; he had dug it up (it was the haft of his
pick-axe that lay broken in the excavation); he had carried it on his back, in many weary
journeys, from the foot of the tall pine to a cave he had on the two-pointed hill at the
north-east angle of the island, and there it had lain stored in safety since two months
before the arrival of the Hispaniola.
When the doctor had wormed this secret from him on the afternoon of the attack,
and when next morning he saw the anchorage deserted, he had gone to Silver, given
him the chart, which was now useless—given him the stores, for Ben Gunn’s cave was

Treasure Island P a g e | 209

well supplied with goats’ meat salted by himself—given anything and everything to get
a chance of moving in safety from the stockade to the two-pointed hill, there to be clear
of malaria and keep a guard upon the money.
“As for you, Jim,” he said, “it went against my heart, but I did what I thought best for
those who had stood by their duty; and if you were not one of these, whose fault was
it?”
That morning, finding that I was to be involved in the horrid disappointment he had
prepared for the mutineers, he had run all the way to the cave, and leaving the squire
to guard the captain, had taken Gray and the maroon and started, making the diagonal
across the island to be at hand beside the pine. Soon, however, he saw that our party
had the start of him; and Ben Gunn, being fleet of foot, had been dispatched in front to
do his best alone. Then it had occurred to him to work upon the superstitions of his
former shipmates, and he was so far successful that Gray and the doctor had come up
and were already ambushed before the arrival of the treasure-hunters.
“Ah,” said Silver, “it were fortunate for me that I had Hawkins here. You would have
let old John be cut to bits, and never given it a thought, doctor.”
“Not a thought,” replied Dr. Livesey cheerily.
And by this time we had reached the gigs. The doctor, with the pick-axe, demolished
one of them, and then we all got aboard the other and set out to go round by sea for
North Inlet.
This was a run of eight or nine miles. Silver, though he was almost killed already with
fatigue, was set to an oar, like the rest of us, and we were soon skimming swiftly over a
smooth sea. Soon we passed out of the straits and doubled the south-east corner of the
island, round which, four days ago, we had towed the Hispaniola.
As we passed the two-pointed hill, we could see the black mouth of Ben Gunn’s cave
and a figure standing by it, leaning on a musket. It was the squire, and we waved a
handkerchief and gave him three cheers, in which the voice of Silver joined as heartily
as any.
Three miles farther, just inside the mouth of North Inlet, what should we meet but
the Hispaniola, cruising by herself? The last flood had lifted her, and had there been
much wind or a strong tide current, as in the southern anchorage, we should never have
found her more, or found her stranded beyond help. As it was, there was little amiss
beyond the wreck of the main-sail. Another anchor was got ready and dropped in a
fathom and a half of water. We all pulled round again to Rum Cove, the nearest point
for Ben Gunn’s treasure-house; and then Gray, single-handed, returned with the gig to
the Hispaniola, where he was to pass the night on guard.

Treasure Island P a g e | 210

 A gentle slope ran up from the beach to the entrance of the cave. At the top, the
squire met us. To me he was cordial and kind, saying nothing of my escapade either in
the way of blame or praise. At Silver’s polite salute he somewhat flushed.
“John Silver,” he said, “you’re a prodigious villain and imposter—a monstrous
imposter, sir. I am told I am not to prosecute you. Well, then, I will not. But the dead
men, sir, hang about your neck like mill-stones.”
“Thank you kindly, sir,” replied Long John, again saluting.
“I dare you to thank me!” cried the squire. “It is a gross dereliction of my duty. Stand
back.”
And thereupon we all entered the cave. It was a large, airy place, with a little spring
and a pool of clear water, overhung with ferns. The floor was sand. Before a big fire lay
Captain Smollett; and in a far corner, only duskily flickered over by the blaze, I beheld
great heaps of coin and quadrilaterals built of bars of gold. That was Flint’s treasure that
we had come so far to seek and that had cost already the lives of seventeen men from
the Hispaniola. How many it had cost in the amassing, what blood and sorrow, what
good ships scuttled on the deep, what brave men walking the plank blindfold, what shot
of cannon, what shame and lies and cruelty, perhaps no man alive could tell. Yet there
were still three upon that island—Silver, and old Morgan, and Ben Gunn—who had each
taken his share in these crimes, as each had hoped in vain to share in the reward.
“Come in, Jim,” said the captain. “You’re a good boy in your line, Jim, but I don’t think
you and me’ll go to sea again. You’re too much of the born favourite for me. Is that you,
John Silver? What brings you here, man?”
“Come back to my dooty, sir,” returned Silver.
“Ah!” said the captain, and that was all he said.
What a supper I had of it that night, with all my friends around me; and what a meal
it was, with Ben Gunn’s salted goat and some delicacies and a bottle of old wine from
the Hispaniola. Never, I am sure, were people gayer or happier. And there was Silver,
sitting back almost out of the firelight, but eating heartily, prompt to spring forward
when anything was wanted, even joining quietly in our laughter—the same bland,
polite, obsequious seaman of the voyage out.

Treasure Island P a g e | 211

 And Last
THE next morning we fell early to work, for the transportation of this great mass of
gold near a mile by land to the beach, and thence three miles by boat to the Hispaniola,
was a considerable task for so small a number of workmen. The three fellows still
abroad upon the island did not greatly trouble us; a single sentry on the shoulder of the
hill was sufficient to ensure us against any sudden onslaught, and we thought, besides,
they had had more than enough of fighting.
Therefore the work was pushed on briskly. Gray and Ben Gunn came and went with
the boat, while the rest during their absences piled treasure on the beach. Two of the
bars, slung in a rope’s end, made a good load for a grown man—one that he was glad
to walk slowly with. For my part, as I was not much use at carrying, I was kept busy all
day in the cave packing the minted money into bread-bags.

Treasure Island P a g e | 212

Treasure Island P a g e | 213
 It was a strange collection, like Billy Bones’s hoard for the diversity of coinage, but so
much larger and so much more varied that I think I never had more pleasure than in
sorting them. English, French, Spanish, Portuguese, Georges, and Louises, doubloons
and double guineas and moidores and sequins, the pictures of all the kings of Europe
for the last hundred years, strange Oriental pieces stamped with what looked like wisps
of string or bits of spider’s web, round pieces and square pieces, and pieces bored
through the middle, as if to wear them round your neck—nearly every variety of money
in the world must, I think, have found a place in that collection; and for number, I am
sure they were like autumn leaves, so that my back ached with stooping and my fingers
with sorting them out.
Day after day this work went on; by every evening a fortune had been stowed aboard,
but there was another fortune waiting for the morrow; and all this time we heard
nothing of the three surviving mutineers.
At last—I think it was on the third night—the doctor and I were strolling on the
shoulder of the hill where it overlooks the lowlands of the isle, when, from out the thick
darkness below, the wind brought us a noise between shrieking and singing. It was only
a snatch that reached our ears, followed by the former silence.
“Heaven forgive them,” said the doctor; “’tis the mutineers!”
“All drunk, sir,” struck in the voice of Silver from behind us.
Silver, I should say, was allowed his entire liberty, and in spite of daily rebuffs, seemed
to regard himself once more as quite a privileged and friendly dependent. Indeed, it
was remarkable how well he bore these slights and with what unwearying politeness
he kept on trying to ingratiate himself with all. Yet, I think, none treated him better than
a dog, unless it was Ben Gunn, who was still terribly afraid of his old quartermaster, or
myself, who had really something to thank him for; although for that matter, I suppose,
I had reason to think even worse of him than anybody else, for I had seen him
meditating a fresh treachery upon the plateau. Accordingly, it was pretty gruffly that
the doctor answered him.
“Drunk or raving,” said he.
“Right you were, sir,” replied Silver; “and precious little odds which, to you and me.”
“I suppose you would hardly ask me to call you a humane man,” returned the doctor
with a sneer, “and so my feelings may surprise you, Master Silver. But if I were sure they
were raving—as I am morally certain one, at least, of them is down with fever—I should
leave this camp, and at whatever risk to my own carcass, take them the assistance of
my skill.”

Treasure Island P a g e | 214

 “Ask your pardon, sir, you would be very wrong,” quoth Silver. “You would lose your
precious life, and you may lay to that. I’m on your side now, hand and glove; and I
shouldn’t wish for to see the party weakened, let alone yourself, seeing as I know what
I owes you. But these men down there, they couldn’t keep their word—no, not
supposing they wished to; and what’s more, they couldn’t believe as you could.”
“No,” said the doctor. “You’re the man to keep your word, we know that.”
Well, that was about the last news we had of the three pirates. Only once we heard
a gunshot a great way off and supposed them to be hunting. A council was held, and it
was decided that we must desert them on the island—to the huge glee, I must say, of
Ben Gunn, and with the strong approval of Gray. We left a good stock of powder and
shot, the bulk of the salt goat, a few medicines, and some other necessaries, tools,
clothing, a spare sail, a fathom or two of rope, and by the particular desire of the doctor,
a handsome present of tobacco.
That was about our last doing on the island. Before that, we had got the treasure
stowed and had shipped enough water and the remainder of the goat meat in case of
any distress; and at last, one fine morning, we weighed anchor, which was about all that
we could manage, and stood out of North Inlet, the same colours flying that the captain
had flown and fought under at the palisade.
The three fellows must have been watching us closer than we thought for, as we soon
had proved. For coming through the narrows, we had to lie very near the southern
point, and there we saw all three of them kneeling together on a spit of sand, with their
arms raised in supplication. It went to all our hearts, I think, to leave them in that
wretched state; but we could not risk another mutiny; and to take them home for the
gibbet would have been a cruel sort of kindness. The doctor hailed them and told them
of the stores we had left, and where they were to find them. But they continued to call
us by name and appeal to us, for God’s sake, to be merciful and not leave them to die
in such a place.
At last, seeing the ship still bore on her course and was now swiftly drawing out of
earshot, one of them—I know not which it was—leapt to his feet with a hoarse cry,
whipped his musket to his shoulder, and sent a shot whistling over Silver’s head and
through the main-sail.
After that, we kept under cover of the bulwarks, and when next I looked out they had
disappeared from the spit, and the spit itself had almost melted out of sight in the
growing distance. That was, at least, the end of that; and before noon, to my
inexpressible joy, the highest rock of Treasure Island had sunk into the blue round of
sea.

Treasure Island P a g e | 215

 We were so short of men that everyone on board had to bear a hand—only the
captain lying on a mattress in the stern and giving his orders, for though greatly
recovered he was still in want of quiet. We laid her head for the nearest port in Spanish
America, for we could not risk the voyage home without fresh hands; and as it was,
what with baffling winds and a couple of fresh gales, we were all worn out before we
reached it.
It was just at sundown when we cast anchor in a most beautiful land-locked gulf, and
were immediately surrounded by shore boats full of Negroes and Mexican Indians and
half-bloods selling fruits and vegetables and offering to dive for bits of money. The sight
of so many good-humoured faces (especially the blacks), the taste of the tropical fruits,
and above all the lights that began to shine in the town made a most charming contrast
to our dark and bloody sojourn on the island; and the doctor and the squire, taking me
along with them, went ashore to pass the early part of the night. Here they met the
captain of an English man-of-war, fell in talk with him, went on board his ship, and, in
short, had so agreeable a time that day was breaking when we came alongside
the Hispaniola.
Ben Gunn was on deck alone, and as soon as we came on board he began, with
wonderful contortions, to make us a confession. Silver was gone. The maroon had
connived at his escape in a shore boat some hours ago, and he now assured us he had
only done so to preserve our lives, which would certainly have been forfeit if “that man
with the one leg had stayed aboard.” But this was not all. The sea-cook had not gone
empty-handed. He had cut through a bulkhead unobserved and had removed one of
the sacks of coin, worth perhaps three or four hundred guineas, to help him on his
further wanderings.
I think we were all pleased to be so cheaply quit of him.
Well, to make a long story short, we got a few hands on board, made a good cruise
home, and the Hispaniola reached Bristol just as Mr. Blandly was beginning to think of
fitting out her consort. Five men only of those who had sailed returned with her. “Drink
and the devil had done for the rest,” with a vengeance, although, to be sure, we were
not quite in so bad a case as that other ship they sang about:
With one man of her crew alive,
What put to sea with seventy-five.
All of us had an ample share of the treasure and used it wisely or foolishly, according
to our natures. Captain Smollett is now retired from the sea. Gray not only saved his
money, but being suddenly smit with the desire to rise, also studied his profession, and
he is now mate and part owner of a fine full-rigged ship, married besides, and the father
of a family. As for Ben Gunn, he got a thousand pounds, which he spent or lost in three

Treasure Island P a g e | 216

weeks, or to be more exact, in nineteen days, for he was back begging on the twentieth.
Then he was given a lodge to keep, exactly as he had feared upon the island; and he still
lives, a great favourite, though something of a butt, with the country boys, and a
notable singer in church on Sundays and saints’ days.
Of Silver we have heard no more. That formidable seafaring man with one leg has at
last gone clean out of my life; but I dare say he met his old Negress, and perhaps still
lives in comfort with her and Captain Flint. It is to be hoped so, I suppose, for his chances
of comfort in another world are very small.
The bar silver and the arms still lie, for all that I know, where Flint buried them; and
certainly they shall lie there for me. Oxen and wain-ropes would not bring me back
again to that accursed island; and the worst dreams that ever I have are when I hear
the surf booming about its coasts or start upright in bed with the sharp voice of Captain
Flint still ringing in my ears: “Pieces of eight! Pieces of eight!”

Treasure Island P a g e | 217